UNISAB II 2.

03

Compressor type: Shop no:

Refrigerant:

Password:

Software version:

03.09
0178_425_en.fm

Instruction Manual
UNISAB II Control
Computerized Control System
for refrigerating compressors

Version 2.03

0178-445 - ENG 1/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Preface
This instruction manual covers reciprocating as
well as screw compressors, unless otherwise stat-
ed. This manual offers a detailed description of
the UNISAB II control system including function,
application, service and trouble shooting.
In the space below you can enter the name and address of your local YORK representative:
This document must not be copied without the
written permission of YORK Refrigeration and the
contents must not be imparted to a third party nor
be used for any unauthorised purpose. Contra-
vention will be prosecuted.
This manual is intended for operating and service
personnel.
Please read this manual carefully so that you fully
understand the UNISAB II control system and
know how to operate it correctly. Damage occur-
ring as a result of incorrect operation is not cov-
ered by YORK Refrigeration‘s guarantee.
2/222
This document is produced by:
YORK Refrigeration
Chr. X’s Vej 201
DK-8270 Hoejbjerg
Denmark
Copyright © 2003 YORK Refrigeration
Be aware of the version number of this manual.
The version number is printed at the bottom of the
preceeding page. It is important that this number
is identical to the UNISAB II version number ap-
pearing for a few seconds in the second line of the
display when turning on power. It is, however,
possible to use a manual with higher version
number than UNISAB II. In such cases use the
section List of Versions to view the differences.
Never use a manual with lower version number
than UNISAB II.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

WWarning!
If it is necessary to service UNISAB II control system, the power supply to the compressor motor must
be switched off at the main switch to prevent the compressor from starting up accidentally.
The UNISAB II box contains live parts, which makes it absolutely necessary to comply with the safety
regulations on site.
Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment and affect personal safety. Even though the power
supply to UNISAB II is switched off, some of the terminals may still be live.
Only authorized personnel is permitted to service UNISAB II. If UNISAB II is connected on a network,
always be aware that the compressor can be started from REMOTE. This cannot be avoided solely
by making choices on the UNISAB II display.

Emergency stop
Activate the emergency stop by a light pressure and deactivate it by turning it clockwise. The emer-
gency stop cuts right into the power circuit of the compressor motor guard. Activation of the emergency
0178_425_en.fm

stop during operation will lead to immediate unloading of the motor guard while there is still power on
UNISAB II. In this way it will always be possible to read the state of the compressor.
Whenever the emergency stop is activated during operation, the alarm text COMPR. MOTOR ERROR
will be read on the display. Before compressor restart is possible, deactivate the alarm by means of
the R key and release the emergency stop. PLEASE OBSERVE: If UNISAB II is set on REMOTE or
AUTO, the compressor will restart automatically.

Technical Data

Power supply: Nominal VAC Tolerance Hz

24 +10/-15% 45 - 65

115 +10/-15% 45 - 65

230 +10/-15% 45 - 65

Consumption: 50 VA
Ambient temperature: 0-55° C (during operation)
Humidity: 20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)
Tightness:
IP 54

0178-445 - ENG 3/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

4/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Operating UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Display in Bar or °C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The user's own picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Application of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Changing of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Resetting of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Procedure for changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
0178-445TOC.fm

Changing a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Changing a function, example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Changing a function, example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Analog alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Suction gas superheat, alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Other alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Oil system error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

0178-445 - ENG 5/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Capacity error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

PMS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
No starting permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Compressor motor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Compressor motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Discharge pressure, overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
High motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil pump error (SAB 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Full flow pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cooling fan error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Wrong starting number in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting discharge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting hot water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Limiting discharge temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
No communication to Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chiller, alarm from Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Watch the oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Vi position error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Evolution, alarm from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evolution, warning from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Evolution, no communication to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Low lubricating pressure monitoring (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1. TIMERS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.TIMER SETUP - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3. SERVICE COUNTER - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4. DATE - TIME - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5. OIL CHARGING - I (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency controlled screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Timer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7. P BAND FACTOR - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Stop delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Special timers in connection with MULTISAB
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1. MULTISAB STATE - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

6/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

Compressor regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
PID regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Set points on regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Universal regulator (Ext. input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Set point control with current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Disch. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Hotwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Capacity control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Climatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Adjusting slide speed (screw compressors with hydraulic slides) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Capacity slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Volume ratio slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Variable Zero position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
0178-445TOC.fm

Corrected capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic setting of new zero point (SAB 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Manual setting of new zero point (all types of screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Built-in spacer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Zero pos. picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electrical slide control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Part load and full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Calculated Vi position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Change to full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Change to part load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Position indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Slide brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Capacity alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Limiting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Standard limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Special limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump . . . . . . . . 111
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
GSV/RWF with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

0178-445 - ENG 7/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

FV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
FV 19 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
without oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
External starting permission - immediate stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
External starting permission -
normal stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Oil charging, manual (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Motor current measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Motor power measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
COP set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Thermistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Aux. output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Capacity down blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Power management system (PMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cold store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Note on screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
HP on TWO-STAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Oil return (reciprocating compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Oil heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Definition of refrigerant R000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pressure transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Calibration of capacity slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Calibration of Vi slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Calibration of motor frequency signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Hydraulic slide systems
(certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting capacity measuring system for turning transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Electrical slide systems (certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Diagnosis pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3) Diagnosis I Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

8/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8) Diagnosis I No of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10) Diagnosis I Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11) Diagnosis I Examine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
12) Diagnosis J New password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13) Diagnosis I Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
15) Diagnosis I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Printed circuit board, light diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacement of door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacement of CPU print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
0178-445TOC.fm

Replacement of relay print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Replacement of EPROM (program) UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Replacement of serial EEPROM (diagnosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Replacement of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Please note that at the next power failure, the problem will be the same. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Installation of data communication cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
The cable must have the following data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

MULTISAB regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
System setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Regulation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

- pref. master = COMPR#. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Start and system numbers - pref. master = START# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Example of regulation - screw compressors only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Regulating parameters (for BRINE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Operating sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

0178-445 - ENG 9/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Example of regulation - combination of screw and reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Loading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
State of transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
State of take-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Unloading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Loading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Unloading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Practical example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Practical example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
The plant does not run in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

List of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Supplementary Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

10/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control
1. Description of UNISAB II control
The purpose of the UNISAB II control system is to
monitor, protect, control and regulate reciprocat-
ing and screw compressors. Both the control box
and the electrical components have been con-
nected from the factory. Thus, only a few connec-
tions are necessary to link the components to the
electrical installations on site.
UNISAB II is programmed according to the type of
compressor it is going to controls. See section
Configuration.
UNISAB II contains different ways of control-
ling/regulating compressor capacity according to
pressure levels or temperatures. Compressor ca-
pacity can be regulated both manually and auto-
matically.
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
Furthermore, a number of limiting functions have
been incorporated. In periods of overloading
these limiting functions will intervene and limit
compressor capacity until the situation has re-
turned to normal. Consequently, the number of
undesirable operational stops will be reduced as
well as the need for supervision.
Compressors fitted with UNISAB II CONTROL
can be linked via the built-in communication sys-
tem, MULTISAB. In this way compressors can
work in a common refrigerating system, thus opti-
mizing the operation of the entire compressor
plant.
The communication system makes it possible
also to connect UNISAB II with a PLC or PC cen-
tral monitoring, control and data logging system.
UNISAB II can be linked to and communicate with
old SABROE control units such as PROSAB II
and UNISAB S/R/RT/RTH.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Other possibilities:
• UNISAB II can be configured to run as a
chiller controller.
• By inserting an optional communication
print, UNISAB II can be configured to com-
municate with
a PLC, the configuration by the name EVO-
LUTION
one or more Quantum compressor control-
lers also manufactured by
YORK Refrigeration.
The above points are described in separate man-
uals, only the configuration is included in this man-
ual.
UNISAB II is operated by means of a front panel
as shown in the following drawing. The front panel
is well-arranged with only a few keys and a distinct
display.
The subsequent description refers to the numbers
in the drawing. On delivery UNISAB II is preset
with a number of factory values and is thus ready
for operation. Therefore, only a few adjustments
are necessary to adapt the UNISAB II system to
its actual use. For this purpose, use the enclosed
leaflet Quick Reference.
UNISAB II is constructed not to lose its preset or
changed values in case of a temporary power fail-
ure. UNISAB II is fitted with a battery, which is
used by the built-in timer so that time and date are
always correct even though current has been dis-
connected. The hour counter and any stored
alarm values will thus maintain the correct time.
11/222
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Fig. 1.1 UNISAB II front panel

10 9 8 7 3 4 2 5 6 1 11 13 12 14 15

Suct.temp. -25°C
Disch.temp. 38°C
Oil press. 4.3 bar
Ready 0%

Operating UNISAB II control Fig. 1.2 Drawing of plugs and their positions

Start-up
On delivery all electrical components in the com-
UNISAB II
pressor are connected to UNISAB II. On site it is
only necessary to add the correct supply voltage
from the local installations. The electric wiring
must be carried out according to the wiring dia-
grams for UNISAB II at the end of this manual.

Note in particular
a. that no outside voltage must be applied to the
digital inputs of UNISAB II.

b. that the code plug for the supply voltage must 230 VAC 115 VAC
be correct compared to the local supply volt-
Also check that the 3 Amp fuse is in good working
age. (see Fig. 1.2)
condition.

12/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Fig. 1.3 Drawing of fuses and their positions points is carried out via the display. The display
contains a number of different pictures.
The control panel is usually closed and locked
with a screw at each end of the panel.
1 2 3 By turning the screws half a turn the control panel
3 Amp is loosened and can be lifted to an open position,
Here, it is fastened to the cabinet (see Fig. 1.4).
UNISAB II
Fig. 1.4 Opening the cabinet

UNISAB II

Before any voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the

emergency stop switch will be activated.
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

UNISAB II

When voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the follow-

ing Main picture will appear in the display, and
UNISAB II will be ready for operation.
SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR

DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR
MOTOR CURR 0A
STOPPED 0%
UNISAB II has been programmed with values for
warning limits, alarm limits, set points, etc. This
makes it possible to start up the compressor im-
mediately.
However, some of the values must always be
adapted to the actual operating situation. For this
purpose use the enclosed leaflet Quick Refer-
ence. It is also recommended to read this manual
carefully to acquire a thorough knowledge of how
to operate UNISAB II.
UNISAB II is operated exclusively by means of the
front panel keys. Reading of operating conditions
as well as changing of limiting values and set
In this way it is still easy to operate the control
panel. At the same time easy access to the cabi-
net interior is obtained.
When UNISAB II is open, it is still fully opera-
tional.
Display
Pos. 1 Has a constant background illumina-
tion and displays 4 lines each with 20
characters. The contrast has been
factory set, but can be adjusted if re-
quired. See subsection Contrast
(display) in section Languages.
Pressure levels, temperatures, set
points as well as warning and alarm
limits can be read in the display.

0178-445 - ENG 13/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control
Front panel
The UNISAB II front panel is divided into two sec-
tions:
The control section, pos. 2 to 10, by means of
which the compressor is controlled.
The recording section, pos. 11 to 15, by means
of which menu pictures are selected and values
changed.
Control section:
Pos. 2 Green lamp indicating whether the
compressor is running. At start-up
this lamp will flash until UNISAB II
has received feedback from the mo-
tor starter. At the same time the text
"STARTING" (lamp flashes) and
"OPERATING" (lamp light steady)
can be seen in the bottom line of an
operating picture.
Pos. 3 Yellow lamp indicating whether the
state of operation is automatic or
manual. Yellow light = manual op-
eration.
Pos. 4 Red lamp indicating warning or
alarm.
Slow flashes = warning;
Quick flashes = alarm.
Pos. 5 A Compressor start at manual
operation by pressing the key once.
Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
Pos. 6 B Compressor stop at manual oper-
ation by pressing the key once.
Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
Pos. 7 C A change between manual
(yellow lamp on) and automatic
(yellow lamp off) takes place by
pressing the key once.
Please note that if manual was se-
lected from the CONTROL menu, it
14/222
is not possible to change to automat-
ic. See section Control Mode.
Pos. 8 D Key used to acknowledge alarms.
Pos. 9 E Loading of capacity during manual
operation. On screw compressors
the slide moves towards higher ca-
pacity as long as the key is held
down. On reciprocating compressors
a new capacity stage is loaded every
time the key is pressed.
Pos. 10 F Unloading of capacity during man-
ual operation. On screw compres-
sors the slide moves towards lower
capacity as long as the key is held
down. On reciprocating compressors
one capacity stage is unloaded every
time the key is pressed.
Recording section
Pos. 11 The G key has several functions.
When pressing the G key, a change
will be made between Bar (PSI) and
°C/R (°F/R) for saturated vapours
when the display shows a suction or
discharge pressure.
Changing the set values can only be
carried out by using the password
shown on page 1 in the instruction
manual for the UNISAB II in ques-
tion.
As to the encoding of a password,
see section Changing Set Values.
Pos. 12 H Used for moving left in the menu
system. Used for selecting pictures
or a digit when changing a value.
Pos. 13 I Used for moving right in the menu
system. Used for selecting pictures
or a digit when changing a value.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Pos. 14 J Used for moving upwards in a pic- Menu structure

ture in order to point at a certain val-
ue, or when changing to a higher val-
ue.
Pos. 15 K Used for moving downwards in a
picture in order to point at a certain
value, or when changing to a lower
value.
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
UNISAB II includes a number of different pictures
on compressor operation, set values, configu-
ration, etc. These pictures are built up in a menu
system in which a certain picture can be selected
by means of the arrow keys.
Fig. 5.1-3 show the structure and the number of
pictures in the menu systems for:
- Screw compressors
- One-stage reciprocating compressors
- Two-stage reciprocating compressors.

0178-445 - ENG 15/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Fig. 1.5
UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03 I PARAMETER SETTING
Menu Tree HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
°C/R
°C/R
Screw Compressor Suction LOW WARN. °C/R
SUCT.PRES. °C/R LOW ALARM °C/R
SUCT.TEMP. °C ACTUAL SP. °C/R
SUCT.SUPERH. °C SETPOINT 1 °C/R
RUNNING 100% SETPOINT 2 °C/R
NEUTRALZONE °C/R
PROP.BAND °C/R
T.INT. SEC
T.DIFF. SEC
Discharge P.PART %
I.PART %
DISCH.PRES. °C/R D.PART %
DISCH.TEMP.DI °C REG.OUTPUT %
SCH.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100%

Oil
Multisab state
OIL PRES. BAR
DIFF.PRES. BAR START NO.
OIL TEMP. °C SYSTEM NO.
RUNNING 100% SYS.CONTROLLER
RUNS BY ITSELF
Motor
MOTOR CURR 0A All compressors
MOTOR POWER 0 kW
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
Main picture Main menu READY 0% SYSTEM # 01
START # 01 J
RUNNING 100%
SUCT.PRES. °C/R SUCTION BRINE
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM Brine
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING Timers
RUNNING MOTOR SETUP BRINE TEMP. °C
100% SUCT.BRINE °C/R START START SEC
EXT.INPUT STOP START SEC
RUNNING 100% START DELAY SEC
STOP DELAY SEC
Alarms Control
NO ALARMS Service-timers
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
ON TIME HOUR
SINCE START
MANUAL

Warnings Multisab Date-time

NO WARNINGS MULTISAB HOUR
MIN
K
MULTISAB STATE SEC
ALL COMPRESSORS DAY
PARALLEL CONTR.
Dig. input
Setup Timers D.INPUT
D.INPUT
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS D.INPUT
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS D.INPUT
TIMERS CONFIG TIMER SETUP
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS Dig. output
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
Capacity Diagnosis D.OUTPUT
CAPACITY 0% DIAGNOSIS D.OUTPUT
CAP POS 0% INSPECT OLD ALARMS Analog. input
VI POSITION 0% MISC.FUNCTIONS
READY 0% PRES. INP 1
SOFTWARE VERSION
PT 100 INP 1
Calibrate EXT.
CALIBRATE
PRESS TRANSDUCER 4-20 MA input
BRINE TEMP. 4 MA
CAPACITY 20 MA

CAPACITY SETPOINT
Config.
CONFIG Auxiliary output
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT
OIL SYSTEM ACTIVE WHEN
AT MAX.CAP

Language
CONTRAST
LANGUSGE GB
H

16/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Fig. 1.6
I PARAMETER SETTING
Suction HIGH ALARM °C/R
HIGH WARN. °C/R
SUCT.PRES. °C/R LOW WARN. °C/R
SUCT. TEMP. °C LOW ALARM °C/R
SUCT.SUPERH. °C ACTUAL SP. °C/R
RUNNING 100%
UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03 SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
°C/R
°C/R
NEUTRALZONE °C/R
Menu Tree PROP.BANDD °C/R
One-stage Discharge
Reciprocating Compressor DISCH.PRES. °C/R
°C
DISCH. TEMP.
DISC.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100% Multisab state
START NO.
SYSTEM NO.
Oil SYS. CONTROLLER
NOT MY TURN
SUCT.PRES. BAR
OIL PRES. BAR
OIL TEMP. °C All compressors
RUNNING 100%
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
Motor SYSTEM # 01
MOTOR CURR 0A START # 01
MOTOR POWER 0 kW RUNNING 100%
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM

Main picture Main menu

READY 0%
Timers J
SUCT.PRES. °C/R SUCTION BRINE START START SEC
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM STOP START SEC
Brine START DELAY SEC
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING
RUNNING 100% MOTOR SETUP STOP DELAY SEC
BRINE TEMP. °C
SUCT.PRES. °C/R
EXT.INPUT
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

RUNNING 100%
Service timers
ON TIME HOUR
SINCE START
Alarms Control
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
NO ALARMS
Datetime
HOUR
MANUAL MIN
SEC
DAY
Warnings Multisab K
MULTISAB
NO WARNINGS
Dig. input
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS D. INPUT
PARALLEL CONTR. D. INPUT
D. INPUT
D. INPUT
Setup Timers
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS Dig. output
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS
TIMER SETUP D. OUTPUT
TIMERS CONFIG D. OUTPUT
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS
D. OUTPUT
D. OUTPUT
Capacity Analog input
Diagnosis
CAPACITY 0%
NOT USED 0% DIAGNOSIS PRES. INP 1
NOT USED 0% PT 100 INP 1
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
READY 0% MISC. FUNCTIONS EXT.
SOFTWARE VERSION
4-20 MA input
Calibrate 4 MA
CALIBRATE 20 MA
PRESS TRANSDUCER CAPACITY SETPOINT
BRINE TEMP.
CAPACITY
Auxiliary output
Config. AUXILIARY OUTPUT
ACTIVATE WHEN
CONFIG. AT MAX.CAP
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM

Language
CONTRAST
H LANGUAGE GB

0178-445 - ENG 17/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Fig. 1.7
I PARAMETER SETTING

Suction
-
UNISAB II Ver. 2.02/2.03 SUCT.PRES.
SUCT.TEMP.
°C/R
°C
HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
°C/R
°C/R
LOW WARN. °C/R
Menu Tree SUCT.SUPERH. °C LOW ALARM °C/R
RUNNING 100% ACTUAL SP.
Two-stage reciprocating com- SETPOINT 1
°C/R
°C/R
pressor SETPOINT 2
NEUTRALZONE
°C/R
°C/R
Discharge PROP.BAND °C/R
DISCH.PRES. °C/R
DISCH.TEMP. °C
DISCH.SUPERH. °C
RUNNING 100%

Multisab state
Oil
START NO.
SUCT.PRES. BAR SYSTEM NO.
OIL PRES. BAR SYS. CONTROLLER
OIL TEMP. °C
RUNNING 100%
J
Motor All compressors
MOTOR CURR 0A COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
MOTOR POWER 0 kW SYSTEM # 01
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM START # 01
READY 0% RUNNING 100%
Main picture Main menu
SUCH.PRES. °C/R SUCTION INTERMED Timers
DISCH.PRES. °C/R DISCHARGE ALARM Intermed.
MOTOR CURR A OIL WARNING START START SEC
RUNNING 100% MOTOR SETUP INTERM.PRES. °C/R STOP START SEC
INTERM.TEMP. °C/R START DELAY SEC
EXT.INPUT STOP DELAY SEC
RUNNING 100%
Service timers
Alarms Control ON TIME HOUR
NO ALARMS
COMPR.CTRL MODE
SINCE START
K
MANUAL Date-time
HOUR
MIN
Warnings Multisab SEC
DAY
NO WARNINGS MULTISAB
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTRS Dig. input
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
Setup Timers D.INPUT
D.INPUT
CONTROL CALIBRATE TIMERS
MULTISAB CAPACITY TIMERS
TIMERS CONFIG. TIMER SETUP Dig. output
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE SERVICE TIMERS
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
Capacity Diagnosis D.OUTPUT
DIAGNOSIS
CAPACITY 0% 4-20 MA input
NOT USED 0% INSPECT OLD ARLAMS
NOT USED 0% MISC. FUNCTIONS PRES. INP 1
READY 0% SOFTWARE VERSION PT 100 INR 1

EXT.
Calibrate
CALIBRATE 4-20 MA input
PRES. TRANSDUCER 4 MA
BRINE TEMP. 20 MA
CAPACITY
SUCT. PRES.
Config. Auxiliary output
TYPE AUXILIARY OUTPUT
REFRIGERAN ACTIVATE WHWN
CONTROL ON AT MAX. CAP
VOLUME RATIO.

Language
CONTRAST
H LANGUAGE GB

18/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried

out by means of the arrow keys in the recording HIGH ALARM XX
panel. HIGH WARNING XX
LOW WARNING XX
The H and I keys make it possible to move to the
LOW ALARM XX
left or the right in the menu tree by pressing the
keys .
The J and K keys make it possible to move up ACTUAL SP XX
and down in the menu picture by moving the dark SETPOINT 1 XX

cursor from line to line. SETPOINT 2 XX

NEUTRAL ZONE XX
PROP. BAND XX
Selecting a picture T.INT. XX

On delivery UNISAB II will display the following T.DIFF. XX

P.PART XX
Main picture when voltage is applied.
I.PART XX
SUCT.PRESS 0.0 BAR D.PART XX
DISCH.PRES 0.0 BAR
REG. OUTPUT XX
MOTOR CURR 0A
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

BLOCKED 0%

It is always possible to return to this picture by Note: The items from NEUTRAL ZONE and
pressing the H key. downwards are only shown when the suction
pressure unit of measure is °C/R. See below for in-
To see Set point 1 for suction pressure regula-
formation on how to change the unit.
tor, do as follows:
Press K until the cursor is at the desired line, SET
With the Main picture in the display, press I
POINT 1, which is read.
Press H until the Main picture appears.
SUCTION BRINE
DISCHARGE ALARM To see the set value for the timer START-DELAY,
OIL WARNING do as follows:
MOTOR SETUP
With the main picture in the display, press I

Press I
SUCTION BRINE
DISCHARGE ALARM
SUCT.PRESS XX
OIL WARNING
SUCT.TEMP XX
MOTOR SETUP
SUCH.SUPERH. XX
BLOCKED X
Press K until the cursor is at SETUP.

Press I Press I

0178-445 - ENG 19/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

POS.NO

CONTROL CALIBRATE 19 DISCH. OVERL. XX

MULTISAB CAPACITY 20 CURR OVERLD. XX

TIMERS CONFIG 21 MOTOR START XX

DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE 22 PMS FEEDBACK XX

23 FULL FLW M. XX
Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS. 24 OIL PUMP M. XX
25 RECT. START XX
Press I
26 RECT DELAY XX
27 RECT DISABLl XX

TIMERS 28 START HP XX

TIMERS 29 NO CHILLER XX

TIMERS SETUP 30 CAP. NEGATIVE XX

SERVICE TIMERS 31 START UNLOAD XX

DATE-TIME 32 LOW SUCT. PRESS. XX

OIL CHARGING 33 LUBR.PRESS. XX

MOTOR FAN 34 Vi-PAUSE XX

PBAND FACTOR
TRANSFER
TAKE-OVER This example applies to screw compressors.
Press K until the cursor is at the desired timer
Press K until the cursor is at START-DELAY.
TIMERS SETUP.
Press H until the Main picture appears.
Press I

Display in Bar or °C/R

POS.NO
Refrigerant pressure levels as eg suction pres-
1 START START XX
sure, discharge pressure or intermediate pressure
2 STOP START XX
can be displayed in either Bar or°C/R. It is possible
3 START DELAY XX
to switch between these two units when the cursor
4 STOP DELAY XX
5 SUCTION RAMP XX
is at the relevant value by briefly pressing the G
6 SLIDE MAX. XX key.
7 PRELUB XX To see suction pressure in °C/R, first select the
8 OIL FLOW XX
picture with SUCT. PRESS. With the cursor on
9 FLOW DELAY XX
SUCT. PRESS, briefly press G and the unit dis-
10 NO OIL FLOW XX
played will change from Bar to °C/R or vice versa.
11 LUBRIC.TIME XX
12 DIF.PRES. OK XX Pressure levels displayed in °C/R are dew point
13 OIL PRES LO XX values.
14 OIL PRES HI XX
15 OIL TEMP. LOW XX
16 OIL TTEMP. HIGH XX
The user's own picture
17 SUPERH. LOW XX As it appears from the menu tree, there is a whole
18 SUPERH. HIGH XX range of operating pictures in UNISAB II. Howev-

20/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

er, if no suitable combination of measuring values

can be found in the same picture, a new picture DISC. PRESS XX
can be constructed. MOTOR CURR XX
OIL TEMP XX
Thus, it is possible to compose a standard picture
READY X
appearing in the display.
If the Main picture is required to include eg OIL
PRESS instead of SUCT. PRESS, proceed as fol- Before changing the main picture, it is recom-
lows: mended to plan how to compose the picture and
Press H until the Main picture appears. in which sequence the values should appear.
Please note that the new value is entered into line
3 and that the value in line 1 disappears.
SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR
DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR If SUCT. PRESS is to appear again in the main
MOTOR CURR 0A picture, proceed as follows:
BLOCKED 0%
Press H until the Main picture appears.

Press I and next K until the cursor reach OIL. DISC. PRESS XX
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

MOTOR CURR XX
OIL TEMP XX
SUCTION BRINE READY X
DISCHARGE ALARM
OIL WARNING
MOTOR SETUP
Press I and again I until

Press I SUCT.PRESS XX
SUCT.TEMP XX
SUCT.SUPERH XX
OIL PRESS XX BLOCKED X
DIFF.PRESS XX
OIL TEMP XX
READY X
By a quick pressure on G it is possible to switch
between Bar and °C/R.

Press and keep G until the cursor covers the Press G , until the cursor covers the entire line.
whole line. OIL PRESS and value are moved to SUCT. PRESS and value are moved to line 3 in
line 3 in the main picture and SUCT. PRESS, line the main picture and DISCH.PRES in line 1 has
1, has disappeared from the main picture. disappeared from the picture:

Press H until the Main picture appears.

0178-445 - ENG 21/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

MOTOR CURR XX Using the H I and K J keys, enter the correct

OIL PRESS XX password.
SUCT.PRESS XX
Press G and the password will be open for 60
READY X
minutes for changing of values.

Changing of set values Changing of password

The set values in UNISAB II can be changed by
On delivery the UNISAB II password is set for a
means of the keys G H I K J
standard four-figure password. All
YORK Refrigeration companies and agents are
Password able to inform of this standard password.
To safeguard against unwanted changes of the It is possible to change this standard password to
set values, a password must be used before the a personal password.
change can take place.
Please note that not more than one password can
When a password has been entered, the system be used at a time.
will be open for 60 minutes. During this period it is
Change the password in menu:
possible to change the system values before it
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW
closes again.
PASSWORD
If the system is required to close earlier, press H
until the main picture appears. By pressing H
once more the system will close.
NEW PASSWORD
Passwords are required for changing CONFIG,
TIMERS, ALARMS, WARNINGS as well as REG- RESET PASSWORD
ULATING PARAMETERS.

Application of password
With the cursor on NEW PASSWORD, press the
When the set value to be changed appears in the
G key and enter the current password, cf section
display and has been marked by the cursor, press
Application of password.
G for approx 2 seconds till the following picture
appears: It is now possible to enter a personal password by
changing the current (shown) password to the one
chosen. The password can be set anywhere be-
tween 0001 and 9999.
PASWORD
1 2 3 4
NEW PASSWORD
SET TO ACCEPT / QUIT
+09999
RESET PASSWORD

22/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

Important! • Changing of functions

It is essential to remember the changed password (compressor type, regulators, etc.)
as any changes of the set values will require the
application of the personal password. The stand- Changing a value
ard password, of which it is possible to be in-
To change the alarm value for
formed by contacting YORK Refrigeration, is no
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE, do as follows:
longer applicable.
• From the main picture, press I until this pic-
ture appears:
Resetting of password
In case the password has been changed to a per-
sonal password and this is no longer known, it is SUCT.PRESS XX
SUCT.TEMP XX
possible to get a special password by contacting
SUCT.SUPERH XX
YORK Refrigeration. This password must be used
READY X
to reset the personal password to
YORK Refrigeration's standard password. • Select Bar or °C/R by a quick pressure on
The password is reset to the standard password in G.
the menu: SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW PASS- • Press I until the following picture appear:
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

WORD

HIGH ALARM XX
HIGH WARNING XX
NEW PASSWORD LOW WARNING XX
LOW ALARM X
RESET PASSWORD
NO ACTUAL SP XX
ETC

• With the K key move the cursor to LOW

With the cursor on RESET PASSWORD, press
the G key, then enter the special password. See
section Application of password.
It is now possible to reset the personal password-
to the standard password by changing NO into
YES by pressing the G key followed by the H
key.
ALARM.
• Press G . Enter password if not already
open (see section Application of password)
• The cursor is now moved to the first digit,
eg 0 as shown in the picture.The signs "+" or
"-" may be seen in front of the digit.

Procedure for changing of set values HIGH ALARM XX

HIGH WARNING XX
There are two types of changes:
LOW WARNING XX
• Changing of values LOW ALARM -0,3 BAR
(alarms, set points, etc.)

0178-445 - ENG 23/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

• Using the arrow keys H I K J, enter the •

new value, eg - 0.5 BAR. COMPRESSOR CONTROL
AUTO
• Press G - the cursor moves to LOW
ALARM, and enter the new value.
• Using the K J keys, change between
HIGH ALARM XX STOPPED-MANUAL-AUTO-REMOTE.
HIGH WARNING XX
• Press G to confirm.
LOW WARNING XX
LOW ALARM -0,5 BAR
Changing a function, example 2
• It is now possible to change other values If required to change the regulating function to
during the 60 minutes the password is open. BRINE regulation, do as follows:
• From the Main picture, press I once.
Changing a function, example 1
• With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
To change the state of operation from AUTO to
REMOTE, proceed as follows: • Press I once more
CONTROL
• From the Main picture, press I once.
• With the K key, move the cursor to CONFIG
SETUP.
• With K, move the cursor to CONFIG.

SUCTION
• Press I once more
CONFIG
CONTROL
SETUP COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
• Press I once.
CONTROL • Press I once more.
CONTROL ON SUCTION
AUTO START YES
AUTO STOP YES
COLD STORE NO
• Press I once.
COMPRESSOR CONTROL • Press G for approx 2 seconds and enter
AUTO the password, if necessary. The cursor
moves to the text at the right side of the line.

• Press G and the cursor moves to the next

line.
CONTROL ON SUCTION

24/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

• With the J K keys, it is now possible to Select G to confirm.

change between: Press H and FACTORY RESET is carried out.
SUCTION - BRINE - DISCHARGE - HOT
UNISAB II is now restored to its Factory setting.
WATER - EXT. COOL - EXT. HEAT.
• Press G to confirm. In the same way other
Languages
functions may be changed by using the cur-
sor to point them out. When selecting the menu LANGUAGE, the fol-
lowing picture will appear:

Factory settings
CONTRAST 50
On delivery UNISAB II is programmed with facto-
LANGUAGE GB
ry settings for all values such as: Alarms, Warn-
ings, Timers, Set points. These values are stated
in tables for reciprocating and screw compressors Contrast (display)
respectively. The contrast setting of the display takes place au-
tomatically, but it is still possible to make a manual
See tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in section Alarms and
adjustment.
warnings, tables 7 and 8 in section Timers and ta-
0178_426_en_2.02.fm

bles 9A, 9B and 9C in section Compressor regu-
lation.
Although other values may have been entered af-
ter delivery, it is always possible to return to the
factory settings in the following way:
For safety reasons, first make sure the compres-
sor is stopped.
From the main picture, press I once.
With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
Press I once to the picture CONTROL.
Press I once more to COMPRESSOR CON-
TROL.
Press G to move the cursor to the second line.
Press J until STOPPED appears.
Press G to confirm.
Carry out factory reset:
Press H to CONTROL and K to CONFIG. and I
to CONTROL. With K move the cursor to FACTO-
RY RESET. Press I to Factory Reset menu.
Press G and the cursor moves to the right. Enter
password if not open. Select YES by means of J .
The contrast of the display is adjusted in the main
menu or any other menu in the following way:
Press the alarm button and K = darker contrast
(lower contrast value) or the alarm button and J =
lighter contrast (higher contrast).
The value is changed just like any other parame-
ter and has an adjusting area from 20-80.
The value 20 gives a dark display.
The value 80 gives a light display.
Changes can be made during compressor opera-
tion. The contrast setting for the best display lies
usually between 30 and 50.
The contrast can be adjusted from any menu pic-
ture by using the keys D and J or K.
Important!
A setting within the minimum (20) or maximum
(80) area may cause a dimming of the display text.
However, it is usually still possible to read the text
by means of a heavy illumination and by viewing
from an angle of approx 20 degrees. Should this
not be possible - ie the display is impossible to
read - carry out a "blind operation" as follows:

0178-445 - ENG 25/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

1.Make sure you are in the Main picture, if neces- F = French

sary by switching the UNISAB II off/on. E = Spanish
DK = Danish
2. Press the following keys, one time each, and in
D = German
the following order: I, J, I J and I (see
CZ = Czech
Fig. 1.5),
S = Swedish
3.Keep G pressed for 5 seconds.
RUS = Russian
4.Press J and/or K. The contrast of the display PL = Polish
should now change gradually, possibly to the oth- P = Portuguese
er extreme. However, it should be possible to se- NL = Dutch
lect a reasonable value (40 or the like). See also I = Italian
section Procedure for changing of set values. N = Norwegian
H = Hungarian
Languages GR = Greek
Like any other function setting (see section Proce- TR = Turkish
dure for changing set values), the language can
be changed to any of the following, even when the
compressor is running: When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or
GB = English when a program RESET has been performed, the
FIN = Finnish set language will be English (GB).

26/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

2. Configuration
adjusted. This is quite normal. RELEASE the
UNISAB II can be configured to a number of differ- emergency stop.
ent functions depending on compressor type, re- Changes in the points that will lead to the above
frigerant, etc. Some of the settings have already situation are marked with ** in the following con-
been made by the factory, but it will always be figuration table.
necessary to make some final settings before The configuration points are common for 1) recip-
start-up. rocating and 2) screw compressors and their use
The immediate configuration can always be is marked in the list.
checked during operation, BUT if one or more The configuration points have been divided into
configuration points have to be changed, always sub-menus available from the menu SETUP I
STOP the compressor and activate the emergen- CONFIG.
cy stop while making the changes.
After changing the configuration, the first pressure
CONFIG
on H will in some cases display the following pic- CONTROL
ture: COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

ECONOMIZER
MOTOR
CONFIGURATION MULTISAB
CHANGED COP
RESTARTING COMMUNICATIONS
- PLEASE WAIT MEASURING UNIT
UNIT/PLANT
FACTORY RESET
Wait a few seconds - the main picture will appear
and UNISAB II will be reconfigured. At this stage In case of a screw compressor, the sub-menus
the picture may be dark as the contrast is being are composed as follows:

0178-445 - ENG 27/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB

3 CONTROL ON SUCTION 11 PREF. MASTER COMPR#
5 AUTO START YES 15 COMMON EVAP/COND N/N
6 AUTO STOP YES 16 HP ON TWO STAGE NO
21 COLD STORE NO 31 TAKE OVER NO
22 CLIMA COMP NO

SETUP I CONFIG I COP

SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR 30 COP ACTIVE NO
1 TYPE SMC106E 36 FLOW FACTOR .20 l/pls
20 SWEPT VOLUM 400m3/h 37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0 C
9 BOOSTER NO
4 VOLUME RATIO MAN
12 ECONOMIZER NO
SETUP I CONFIG I
27 MECH. ZERO NO
28 MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
COMMUNICATIONS
34 VI MODE 70.0% 38 DANBUSS YES

23 ADD. UNLOAD NO 10 COMPR. NO 1

24 BAUD RATE 19200
29 PORT1 EVOL. FX2N
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM 39 NODE NO 0
7 PRELUBRICATION NO 40 BAUD RATE 9600
8 FULL FLOW PUMP NO 41 PORT 2 QUANTUM
18 OIL COOLING NONE 42 NODE NO 77
17 WATER COOLED NO 43 BAUD RATE 1200
25 OIL RECTIFIER NO 50 PROFIBUS YES
51 NODE NO 3

SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER 52 BAUD RATE 12M

13 ECO. LO. CAP 0.0%

14 ECO. HI. SUCT. TEMP 0.0 C/R SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING
UNIT
26 PRESS/TEMP BAR/C
45 PRESS -1/9-1/25

SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR 44 MOTOR SIGNAL kW

53 MOTOR INPUT 4-20 mA
19 RANGE MOTOR CUR. 1200 A
54 CAP/FREQ CAP.POS
47 RANGE MOTOR kW 1000 kW
35 MOTOR SIZE 500 kW
46 ROTATUNE YES SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT
48 MIN FREQ 1000 RPM 2 REFRIGERANT R22
49 MAX FREQ 6000 RPM 32 CHILLER NO

28/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET • Use the H I and J K keys to enter the
33 FACTORY RESET NO new configuration.
• Press G to confirm.
• With J or K move the cursor to the next
value to be changed.
Carry out configuration as follows:
• When finished changing the values, use H
• Select the picture SETUP, move the cursor to quit the sub-menu and thereby to activate
to CONFIG. and press I once. the possible changes, which will make
• Move the cursor with K and J to the rele- UNISAB II restart.
vant sub-menu and press I . The following table (cf next page) gives a descrip-
• Move the cursor with K to the function that tion of each configuration point as well as possible
is going to be changed. choices with reference to the position numbers in
the previous pictures.
• Press G and enter password if not already
open.

CONFIGURATION
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

No Function for Possible choices

*1* TYPE 1) Reciprocating and 2) Screw

*2* REFRIGERANT 1)2) R717; R22; R502; R23; R404a;

R134A; R507; R410A; R407C; R744; R1270,
R290, R000

3 CONTROL ON 1)2) Suction; Brine; Discharge;

Hot water; Ext.cool; Ext.heat.

4 VOLUME RATIO 2) Man; Auto

5 AUTO START 1)2) Yes; No

6 AUTO STOP 1)2) Yes; No

7 PRELUB. 2) Yes; No

8 FULL FLOW PUMP 2) Yes; No

9 BOOSTER 2) Yes; No

*10* COMPR.NO. 1)2) 1 to 14

11 PREF. MASTER 1)2) Compressor; Start

12 ECONOMIZER 2) Yes; No

13 ECO LO CAP 2) 0% to 100%

14 ECO HI SUCT 2) -100°C/Rto 100 °C/R

15 COMM. EVAP/CONDENS 1)2) N/N; N/Y; Y/N; Y/Y

0178-445 - ENG 29/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

CONFIGURATION

No Function for Possible choices

16 HP ON TWO STAGE 1)2) Yes; No

17 WATER COOLED 1) Yes; No

18 OIL COOLING 1)2) No; Normal; HLI/BLI; Thermo pump;

3-way valve; AKV

19 RANGE M.CURR 1)2) 0 Amp to 2500 Amp

20 SWEPT VOLUME 1)2) 0 m3/h to 12000 m3/h

21 COLD STORE 1)2) Yes; No

22 CLIMA CONTROL 1) Yes; No

23 ADD. UNLOAD 1) Yes; No

*24* BAUD RATE 1)2) 1200 Baud to 19200 Baud

25 OIL RECTIFIER 2) Yes; No

*26* PRESS/TEMP 1)2) BAR / ° C;PSI / ° F; KPA /°C

27 MECHANICAL ZERO 2) Yes; No

28 MANUAL ZERO 2) 0% til 40%

*29* PORT 1 1) 2) NONE; EVOLUTION A1S; EVOLUTION FX2N

30 COP ACTIVE 1) 2) Yes; No

31 TAKE OVER 1) Yes; No

32 CHILLER 1) 2) Yes; No

*33* FACTORY RESET 1)2) Yes; No

34 VI MODE 2) 70% to 97%

35 MOTOR SIZE 1)2) 0 to 2500 kW

36 FLOW FACTOR 1)2) 0.01 to 10 litres per pulse

37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 1)2) 0° C to 99.9° C

38 DANBUSS 1)2) Yes (not changeable)

39 NODE NO (Port 1) 1)2) 0 (not changeable)

40 BAUD RATE (Port 1) 1)2) 1200 baud to 38400 baud

41 PORT 2 1)2) NONE or QUANTUM

42 NODE NO (Port 2) 1)2) 1 to 99

43 BAUD RATE (Port 2) 1)2) 1200 (not changeable)

44 MOTOR SIGNAL 1)2) kW or Amp

30/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

CONFIGURATION

No Function for Possible choices

45 PRESSURE 1)2) -1/9 - -1/25; -1/25 - -1/59

46 ROTATUNE 1)2) Yes; No

47 RANGE MOTOR (kW) POWER 0-2500 kW

48 MINIMUM FREQUENCY 700 to 2000 revolutions

49 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 1100 to 12000 revolutions

50 PROFIBUS Yes; No

51 NODE NO 1 to 254

52 BAUD RATE 12 mbit (not changeable)

53 MOTOR INPUT 0-1 amp / 4-20 mA

54 CAP/FREQ Cap. pos./Freq.

0178_427_en_2.02.fm

0178-445 - ENG 31/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

Pos. 1: TYPE VMY 447 M

NOT-DEF SAB 202 S
SMC 104 S/L SAB 202 L
SMC 104 E SAB 128H MK3
SMC 106 S/L SAB 163H MK3
SMC 106 E SAB 330S
SMC 186 SAB 330 L
SMC 108 S/L SAB 330E
SMC 108 E SAB 80
SMC 188 FV 17/19
SMC 112 S/L *SV 17/19
SMC 112 E FV 24/26
SMC 116 S/L SV 24/26
SMC 116 E S 50
CMO 24 S 70
CMO 26 S 93
CMO 28 SAB 128 HR
TSMC 108 S/L SAB 163 HR
TSMC 108 E GST 13 - 16 - 20
TSMC 188 GST 25 - 31 - 41
TSMC 116 S/L GSV 50 L
TSMC 116 E GSV 64 L
TCMO 28 GSV 84 L
TCMO 28NEW GSV 111 L
HPC 104 S GSV 147 L
HPC 106 S GSV 185 L
HPC 108 S GSV 224 L
HPO 24 RWF 270 L
HPO 26 GSV 263 L
HPO 28 GSV 331 L
SAB 110 S GSV 339 L
SAB 110 L RWF 480 L
SAB 128HMK1 GSV 412 L → 0153 L
SAB 128HMK2 GSV 412 L → 0154 L
SAB 163HMK1 GSV 562 L → 0222 K
SAB 163BMK1 GSV 562 L 0222 K →
SAB 163HMK2 GSV 715 L → 0109 XL
VMY MK2 GSV 715 L 0110 XL →
VMY 347 H GSV 900 L
VMY 347 M GSV 50 H
VMY 447 H GSV 64 H

32/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

GSV 84 H R407C
GSV 111 H R744
GSV 147 H R 1270
GSV 185 H R 290
GSV 224 H R000
RWF 270 H For R407C (and all other refrigerants) the convert-
GSV 263 H ed pressure is always shown as dew point values.
GSV 331 H
GSV 339 H Before the user-defined refrigerant R000 is cho-
RWF 480 H sen, the refrigerant curve must be entered in pic-
GSV 412 H → 0153 L ture SETUP I CALIBRATION I DEF. REFRIG-
GSV 412 H → 0154 L ERANT R000. See also section Compressor con-
GSV 562 H → 0222 K trol and surveillance, Define refrigerant R000.
GSV 562 H 0222 K → Pos. 3: CONTROL ON:
GSV 715 H → 0109 XL SUCTION
GSV 715 H 0110 XL → BRINE
GSV 900 H DISCHARGE
GSB 84 - GSB 465 HOT WATER
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

SAB 283 L EXT. COOL

SAB 283 E EXT. HEAT
SAB 355 L
SUCTION: Pressure is measured by the built-in
SAB 110 SR/LR
pressure transducer on the compres-
Note: Please note that the screw compressors sor suction side.
SV 17/19 and GSB 84 - GSB 465 are not yet sup- Set point is set in the picture
ported. SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETER.
Note: Choose GVS/RWF L for compressors with BRINE: Temperature is measured by an ex-
“low volume range” (1.7 - 3.0) and GSV/RWF H tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output
for compressors with “high volume range” (2.2 - of the evaporator.
5.0). See compressor name plate for indication af Set point is set in the picture BRINE
volume range. TEMP. I PARAMETER.
Pos. 2: REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE:
NOT-DEF. Pressure is measured by the built-in
R717 pressure transducer on the compres-
R22 sor discharge side.
R502 Set point is set in the picture
R23 DISCH.PRES I PARAMETER.
R404A HOT WATER:
R134A Temperature is measured by an ex-
R507 tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output
R410A of the condenser. Set point is set in

0178-445 - ENG 33/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
the picture BRINE I BRINE TEMP.
I PARAMETERS.
EXT.COOL: At this stage it is possible to connect
an external 4-20 mA transducer as
cooling function, ie at a rising signal
the compressor will load capacity.
Furthermore, select EXTERNAL IN-
PUT SIGNAL in picture SETUP I
CALIB I 4-20 mA input. The points
4 mA as well as 20 mA must be set
as the max (20 mA) and min (4 mA)
values of the sensor.
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
RAMETER and enter regulator set
point, neutral zone and prop.band.
See also section Regulators
EXT.HEAT: At this stage it is possible to connect
an external 4-20 mA transducer as
heating function, ie at a falling signal
the compressor will load capacity.
Select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
in picture SETUP I CALIB I 4-20
mA input. The points 4 mA as well as
20 mA must be set as the max (20
mA) and min (4 mA) values of the
sensor.
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
RAMETER and enter regulator set
point, neutral zone and prop.band.
See also section Regulators
Pos. 4: VOLUME RATIO (screw compr.)
MANUAL/AUTO
If AUTO is selected, compressor must be fitted
with solenoid valves, etc for automatic regulation
of Vi slide.
Pos. 5: AUTO START
NO
YES
34/222
If YES is selected, compressor will start by itself in
AUTO/REMOTE depending on what is required.
Regulation is now automatic.
If NO is selected, start compressor manually
even though in AUTO/REMOTE. Howver, dur-
ing operation compressor regulates automatically.
Pos. 6 :AUTO STOP
NO
YES
If YES is selected, compressor will stop automati-
cally at minimum capacity by decreasing demand.
If NO is selected, compressor must be stopped
manually even if AUTO or REMOTE has been se-
lected in COMPRESSOR CTRL. MODE.
Pos. 7: PRELUBRICATION (screw compr.)
NO
YES
a. Select YES for SAB Mk1, SAB Mk3,
SAB 202, SAB 250, SAB 330, VMY Mk3,
VMY Mk2, FV 19, SV 24/26 and FV 24/26.
Prelubrication time is set in picure TIMERS I
TIMER SETUP.
b. Select NO for all other screw compressors.
When compressor has received starting signal,
prelubrication will start. When prelubrication is
completed, compressor will start. See also section
Timer Setup, which includes time settings.
Pos. 8: FULL FLOW PUMP (screw compr.)
NO
YES
Select YES for VMY Mk3 compressor provided it
is fitted with FULL FLOW PUMP.
Select NO for all other compressor types.
Use pump for prelubrication before start-up and to
maintain minimum oil pressure during operation.
At the same time remember to set set points 1 and
2, which determine at which pressure levels the
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

pump is going to start and stop. Select picture OIL START#: If START# is selected, the compressor
PRESS I PARAMETER. which has the lowest starting number and which is
in REMOTE (MULTISAB) will be the regulator.

XX Pos. 12: ECONOMIZER (screw compr.)

LOW WARNING XX NO
SET POINT 1 XX YES
SET POINT 1 XX
If the compressor is connected to an economizer,
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump this function must be selected. Thus the econo-
will start; SELECT 5.5 Bar. mizer is connected/disconnected according to the
SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump compressor operation. The connection is impor-
will stop; SELECT 7.0 Bar. tant as regards the regulation of the compressor
For more details, see Compressor control and volume ratio.
surveillance. Pos. 13: ECO LO CAP (screw compr.)
Pos. 9: BOOSTER (screw compr.) 0 to 100%
NO If the immediate slide position is higher than the
YES set value, connect the economizer. If the slide po-
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

YES means that the oil pump will run continuously
during compressor operation. The capacity slide
can thus be moved at low pressure conditions.
Note that both SAB Mk3, SAB 202, VMY Mk3,
SV/FV and GSV/SGC compressors are fitted with
differential pressure controlled oil pumps (see ta-
ble 1) and consequently do not use this configura-
tion point.
Pos.10: COMPR. NO. 1 to 14
This no must be entered into UNISAB II. The com-
pressor has now been "named".
Two compressors must under no circum-
stances have the same number.
Pos. 11: PREF. MASTER
START#
COMPR#
COMPR#: If COMPR# is selected, the compres-
sor with the lowest no (pos 10) will always be the
regulator in a MULTISAB system, independent of
the starting sequence.
sition is 20% below this value, disconnect the
economizer again.
Pos. 14: ECO HI SUCT (screw compr.)
-100 to +100°C/R
With ECO operation it is possible to enter a suc-
tion pressure value in °C/R. If the suction pressure
of the economizer is above this value, the sole-
noid valves connected in the economizer system
will be closed. Hysteresis of 2°C/R.
By a combined ECO and HLI operation the set
value must not be above -20°C/R.
Pos. 15: COMMON EVAP/COND
N/N
N/Y
Y/N
Y/Y
This point can be configured to the following four
values:
N/N - separate evaporator and condenser for
each compressor.
N/Y - separate evaporator for each compressor,

0178-445 - ENG 35/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
but common condenser.
Y/N - common evaporator, but separate condens-
er for each compressor.
Y/Y - common evaporator and condenser for each
plant (ie compressors with a MULTISAB system
no).
On plants with a common evaporator the suction
pressure limiter cannot start the next compressor
in the sequence. This is only possible if a separate
evaporator has been configured.
On plants with a common condenser the dis-
charge limiter cannot start the next compressor in
the sequence. This is only possible on plants with
separate condensers.
Pos. 16: HP ON TWO STAGE
NO
YES
Usually NO is chosen
In special cases on a two-stage plant YES can be
selected for HP compressors. The compressors
can thus be forced to start by means of the input
"External starting permission".
Please note that the compressor does not stop
before the starting permission has been removed
even though there is no cooling requirement. See
detailed description in section Compressor control
and surveillance, HP on TWO-STAGE
Pos. 17: WATER COOLED (recip.compr.)
NO
YES
36/222
Water cooling output is activated by a rising dis-
charge pipe temperature. The set point for this
value is set in picture DISCH. TEMP I PARAM-
ETER, SET POINT 1. The set point has fixed hys-
teresis of 5K.
Ex.: Sp 1 = 100°C:
Cooling starts at 100°C and stops at (100-5) =
95°C.
Water cooling output is closed at compressor stop
according to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM-
ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL
COOL ON.
Intermediate pressure liquid injection (two-
stage reciprocating compressors)
The intermediate pressure liquid injection for
TSMC/TCMO compressors is active whenever
the compressor is configured to TCMO or TSMC.
The solenoid valve for intermediate pressure liq-
uid injection is activated when the compressor has
started and the discharge pipe temperature gets
too high.
The set point for this value is entered in picture:
DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2.
The set point has fixed hysterisis of 5°K.
Ex.: Sp2 = 90°C. Cooling starts at 90°C and stops
at (90-5) = 85°C.
Adjusting range: -20°C-+150°C.
Factory value: 100°C.
The regulator controls the solenoid valve through
the liquid injection digital output.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

Pos. 18: Oil cooling - setting

No. Type of regulator Minimum Maximum Factory Unit
setting

RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

2 Set point 1/oil temp. +35 +75 +55 °C

Difference 5(fixed) °C
Oil cooling

Set point 2/oil temp. 0 +75 +35 °C

Difference 5(fixed) °C
Oil heating

Set point 1/disch.pipe -20 +150 +100 °C

temp. Difference 5(fixed) °C
Water cooling

Set point 2/disch.pipe -20 +150 +100 °C

temp. Difference 5(fixed)
Interm.pressure
liquid injection

SCREW COMPRESSORS
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

2 Set point 1/oiltemp. +35 +75 +50 °C

Difference 5(fixed) °C
Oil cooling,
normal

3 Set point 1/disch. pipe -20 +150 +40 °C

temp. Difference 2(fixed) °C
HLI/BLI cooling

5 Set point 1/oil temp. +35 +75 +50 °C

Neutral zone 0 100 4 °C
Prop.band 0 100 5 °C
Oil cooling
Three-way valve

6 Set point 1/pressure pipe -20 +150 40 °C

temp.
Neutral zone 0 10 0 °C
Prop. Band 1 100 10 °C
AKV (HLI) oil cooling

0178-445 - ENG 37/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

Pos. 18: OIL COOLING for oil cooling, which is regulated according
1) NONE to oil temperature. The set point for this
value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAM-
2) NORMAL (Screw and recip. compr.)
ETER. SET POINT, NEUTRAL ZONE and
3) HLI/BLI (Screw compressors) PROPORTIONAL BAND can now be set.
4) TH.PUMP (Thermo pump, reciprocating This regulator is usually not used. However,
compr.) it can be used provided that a valve with mo-
tor drive is fitted.
5) THREE-WAY (Screw compressor)
6) AKV
6) AKV
Direct regulation of HLI cooling by pulse
1) NONE width modulated AKV valve. During a period
Oil cooling disconnected. of 6 seconds, the AKV valve is kept open
2) NORMAL from 0 to 6 seconds depending on the regu-
Oil cooling output is activated by rising oil lator output signal.
temperature. The HLI-AKV cooling outlet is activated by rising
The set point for this value is set in picture discharge pipe temperature.
OIL TEMP I PARAMETER I SETPOINT
The set point for discharge pipe temperature is
1. The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5K.
adjusted in the parameter picture DISCH.TEMP
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C: I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1.
Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-5) = 35°C.
In the same picture NEUTRAL ZONE and PRO-
Oil cooling output is closed at compressor stop ac- PORTIONAL BAND can be adjusted.
cording to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM-
Example:
ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL
Set point 1= 60°C
COOL ON.
Neutral Zone= 4°C
3) HLI/BLI Proportional Band= 5°C
Oil cooling output is activated by rising dis-
The regulator keeps the discharge pipe tempera-
charge temperature.
ture between 58°C and 62°C.
The set point for this value is set in picture
DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET Pos.19: RANGE M. CURR 0 to 2500A
POINT 1. The set point has a fixed hystere- This value can be read on the current transformer
sis of 2K. at the compressor motor guard (not on the com-
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C: pressor motor) so that the 0-1 Amp. signal is read
Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-2) = 38°C. correctly on UNISAB II as the current absorbed by
the motor.
4) TH.PUMP
Output for activating thermo pump takes Enter current in picture MOTOR I MOTOR
place at compressor start-up. No regulation CURR I PARAMETER. Any indication errors can
is connected to this function. be eliminated from the reading on the display by
multiplying the measuring range with a correcting
5) THREE-WAY
Used for controlling three-way motor valve

38/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

factor: Pos. 23: ADD. UNLOAD (reciprocating compr.)

NO
Measured current
Correction = YES
Display reading
Select YES for SMC compressors fitted with addi-
before entering the current in the UNISAB II dis- tional solenoid valve for add. unload.
play. Select NO for all other reciprocating compressors
Pos. 20: SWEPT VOLUME and always for CMO, TCMO and TSMC.
0 to 12000 m3/h When the compressor is started, it will still activate
The compressor swept volume must be entered in the first capacity stage, but during operation
MAN/AUTO/REMOTE it will be able to unload
plants which only consist of:
down to 0% capacity. To avoid a high oil temper-
• Screw compressors ature at this stage of operation, a fixed time limit of
• Screw and reciprocating compressors in the 300 seconds which will stop the compressor on
same system. expiry has been corporated.
On plants consisting solely of reciprocating com- Pos. 24: BAUD RATE
pressors the above is not relevant. 1200
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

Read the swept volume on the compressor name 2400

plate. 4800
9600
Pos. 21: COLD STORE
19200
NO
YES In this position the speed at which several
UNISAB II units communicate with each other can
If this function is chosen, it will affect the way the be set.
MULTISAB system starts and regulates the com-
pressors in a common system. See detailed de- The new UNISAB II allows a communication
scription under the function Cold store. speed of up to 19,200 baud.
This only applies to UNISAB II versions manufac-
Pos. 22: CLIMATE CONTROL
tured from May 1998 supplied with revision G re-
NO
lay prints (relay no 7 will in such cases be mount-
YES
ed in the socket).
If the compressor is used for water/brine cooling
For older UNISAB II units, the maximum is 9600
or for heating water, the flow temperature can be
baud.
raised or lowered, depending on the outside tem-
perature. Usually always select the highest baud rate that
all units on the network can use.
An extra 4 - 20 mA temperature transducer must
be connected. If UNISAB II is connected with UNISAB I and/or
PROSAB II, adjust speed to 1200 baud.
For detailed description see section Climatic con-
trol.

0178-445 - ENG 39/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 25: OIL RECTIFIER
NO
YES
The oil rectifying function is used on brine plants
in marine execution. In case this function is select-
ed, check also the timers Oil Rectifying Start, Oil
Rectifying Delay and Oil Rectifying Blocked.
Pos. 26: PRESS/TEMP
BAR/°C
PSI/°F
KPA/°C
Pressure levels and temperatures can be dis-
played in either SI units: Bar, kPa and °C or US
units: PSI and °F.
Pos. 27: MECHANICAL ZERO
NO
YES
Only in case the compressor has a built-in spacer
block as well as automatic Vi regulation, ME-
CHANICAL ZERO must be set for YES. In this
way the travel of the capacity slide is automatically
reduced by the percentage (0-40%) entered in
MANUAL ZERO. Thus corrected capacity is cal-
culated and shown correctly - see the following ta-
ble.
Pos. 28: MANUAL ZERO
0 to 40%
For screw compressors without automatic zero
point setting, it is possible manually to set a "zero
point" below which the compressor capacity slide
is not allowed to fall while the compressor is oper-
ating.
In case the compressor has a built-in spacer
block as well as automatic Vi regulation, MAN-
UAL ZERO is used for reducing the travel of the
capacity slide by the entered percentage. Thus
corrected capacity is calculated and shown cor-
rectly.
40/222
The value [0-40%] to be entered in MANUAL
ZERO must be of the following size:
Lenght of spacer block 4 x 100
Manual zero [%]
Max movement of capacity slide 2
See the following table.
For SAB 202, which has automatic zero point set-
ting, the value 0% must be kept in FACT. setting.
See also pos. 27 MECHANICAL ZERO.
Pos. 29: PORT 1
Note that the use of PORT 1 requires UNISAB II
to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board
UNICOM IF.
NONE
EVOLUTION A1S
EVOLUTION FX2N
Select EVOLUTION A1S or EVOLUTION FX2N if
UNISAB II is to be used as an EVOLUTION con-
trol, ie an extended (PLCY) control in which
UNISAB II is integrated with a PLC control.
Select NONE if UNISAB II is to be used as an EV-
OLUTION control.
Pos. 30: COP ACTIVE
Note that the use of COP ACTIVE requires
UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed cir-
cuit board UNICOM IF.
NO
YES
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with a function for
COP measuring (Coefficient Of Performance, ie
cooling efficiency of compressor). COP measur-
ing requires an extra card for flow measuring as
well as a motor efficency measuring device, cf
UNISAB II COP Manual.
Select NO if UNISAB II is not used for COP meas-
uring.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

Pos. 31: TAKE OVER (reciprocating This selection is identical to MOTOR SIZE found
compressors) in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
NO section COP setting.
YES
Pos. 36: FLOW FACTOR
Select YES if UNISAB II is configured as a recip- 0.01 to 10 l/pls
rocating compressor, operates in a combined
This selection is identical to FLOW FACTOR
plant of reciprocating and screw compressors and
found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP.
the function MULTISAB TAKE OVER/TRANS-
See section COP setting.
FER is required.
Pos. 37: LIQ. SUBCOOL
Pos. 32: CHILLER
0 to 99.9 °C
NO
YES1) Chiller This selection is identical to LIQ. SUBCOOL found
2) Evolution in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
section COP setting.
Select YES if UNISAB II is used as part of a chiller
unit control, ie UNISAB II and a UNISAB II chiller Pos. 38: DANBUSS
control are connected via a communication cable. YES (not changeable)
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

See UNISAB II-Chiller Manual. Functions as header of the menu Communication.

Shows that the succeeding COMPR. NO and
Always select NO if UNISAB II is not connected to
BAUD RATE refer to the main communication
a UNISAB II chiller
port, which always runs the Danbuss protocol.
Pos. 33: FACTORY SETTING
Pos. 39: NODE NO ( Port 1)
NO
0 (not changeable)
YES
When the optional communication port 1 is not
With this function it is possible to restore the orig-
used or used for EVOLUTION (see Pos. 29), the
inal values as determined ex factory.
NODE NO is fixed and cannot therefore be
See section Factory settings. changed.
Current configuration as well as calibration values Pos. 40: BAUD RATE ( Port 1)
for pressure transducers and brine temperatures
1200 to 38400 baud
will remain unchanged.
Selection of communication speed for the optional
Pos. 34: VI MODE communication port 1 (see Pos. 29).
70 to 97%
Pos. 41: PORT 2
This point is only relevant for screw compressors
Note that the use of PORT 2 requires UNISAB II
with electrical slide control. See section Electrical
to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board
slide control.
UNICOM IF.
Pos. 35: MOTOR SIZE NONE or QUANTUM
0 to 2500 kW or Amp
Select QUANTUM if UNISAB II is to work together
with one or more Quantum compressor control-

0178-445 - ENG 41/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
lers (also manufactured by YORK Refrigeration)
and/or with one or more Grammatic 2502 com-
pressor controllers. See also QUANTUM manual
S90-010-M and S90-010-O.
Select NONE, if Port 2 is not used.
Pos. 42: NODE NO (Port 2)
1 to 99
If UNISAB II is to communicate with QUANTUM
(Pos. 41), select a node number which is not iden-
tical to any of the Quantum node numbers.
Pos. 43: BAUD RATE (Port 2)
1200 (not changeable)
Selection of communication speed for the optional
communication port 2 (see Pos. 41). As Quantum
reguires 1200 baud fixed, the speed cannot be
changed.
Pos. 44: MOTOR SIGNAL
kW or Amp
When not using UNICOM IF print, the measured
signal can be either an ampere or a kW signal.
In case of Amp signal input, use terminals 35-36
for 0 - 1 Amp AC.
In case of kW signal input, use terminals 35-40 for
4-20 mA DC.
However, it is also possible to use the 4-20 mA
terminals 35-40 for reading Ampere. In this case
choose 4-20 mA in configuration point pos. 53.
Pos. 45: PRESS
- 1/9 - 1/25
-1/25-1/59
Shows the pressure range for pressure transmit-
ters mounted on compressor. Usually -1/9 -1/25 is
selected for ordinary compressor operation (de-
fault) and - 1/25 -1/59 for heat pump operation or
operation with R744 (CO2).
42/222
Pos. 46: ROTATUNE
NO
YES
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted on a compressor
with frequency converter and if this compressor is
to run in sequence with one or more conventional
screw or reciprocating compressors.
Select NO if this compressor is to run in seqence
with another Rotatune compressor.
Note: This function will be active from EPROM
version 2.01 ROTA and later versions.
For further information, please see ROTA Appen-
dix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes
the use of frequency converters together with
UNISAB II.
Pos. 47: RANGE MOTOR (kW) 0-2500 kW
POWER
Enter the value corresponding to 20mA input. For
use of Vacon converter, this value is read on the
frequency converter name plate and multiplied by
two so that the 4-20 mA signal is read correctly in
UNISAB II as the motor power. Enter the motor
nominal power in the picture MOTOR I MOTOR
SIZE I PARAMETER.
Pos. 48: MINIMUM FREQUENCY
700 to 2000 revolutions
The minimum number of revolutions which can be
shown on the UNISAB II display when the analog
output signal is 4 mA from the UNICOM IF add-on
printed circuit board to the frequency converter.
The frequency converter must of course be con-
figured correctly, ie in minimum permissible fre-
quency. See converter instruction manual and list
of settings for details. See moreover ROTA Ap-
pendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix de-
scribes the use of frequency converters together
with UNISAB II.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 49: MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
1100 to 12000 revolutions
The maximum number of revolutions which can
be shown on the UNISAB II display when the an-
alog output signal is 20 mA from the UNICOM IF
add-on printed circuit board to the frequency con-
verter. The frequency converter must of course be
configured correctly, ie in maximum permissible
frequency. See converter instruction manual and
list of settings for details. See moreover ROTA
Appendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix de-
scribes the use of frequency converters together
with UNISAB II.
Pos. 50: PROFIBUS
NO
YES
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
Only for internal use within YORK Marine
Group.
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with UNICOM IF
add-on printed circuit board and is to communi-
cate with Mitsubishi PLC via PROFIBUS commu-
nication.
Select NO if the above is not the case.
Pos. 51: NODE NO
1 to 254
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
If UNISAB II is to communicate with Mitsubishi
PLC (Pos. 50), select node number which is differ-
ent from the node numbers of the PLC control.
Pos. 52: BAUD RATE
12 mbit (cannot be changed)
Pos. 53: MOTOR INPUT
0 - 1 amp / 4 - 20 mA
Select 0-1 amp when the measured motor current
is supplied from a current transformer with am-
pere ratio xxx/1 amp connected to the terminals
35-36.
Select 4-20 mA when the measured motor current
is supplied from a 4-20 mA transmitter, for in-
stance a frequency converter or other equipment.
The terminals 35 and 40 are used here.
Pos. 54: CAPACITY/FREQUENCY
Cap.Pos.
Frequency
Select Cap.Pos. if the terminal input for capacity
(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a capacity
slide transmitter.
Select Frequency if the terminal input for capacity
(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a frequen-
cy converter so that changes in the motor frequen-
cy are shown as changes in the capacity.
43/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

Table 2.1
Screw compressor Max movement Evaporating Length of Mechanical Manual
type of capacity slide temp.R717/R22 spacer block zero zero
1 2 3 4 5 6
mm mm (pos 27) (pos 28)
SAB 110SM
84.5 < -20°C 22 NO 0%
SAB 110SF
SAB 110 LM
96 > -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 110 LF
SAB 128 HM Mk2
< -20°C 31.5 NO 0%
SAB 128 HF Mk2
126
SAB 128 HM Mk3
> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 128 HF Mk3
SAB 163 M Mk1, Man Vi
SAB 163 F Mk1, Man Vi < -20°C 38.5 NO 0%
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Man Vi
160
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Man Vi > -20°C NONE NO FACT0%
SAB 163 HF Mk3, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Aut Vi
< -20°C 38.5 YES 24 %
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Aut Vi
160
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Aut Vi
> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%
SAB 163 HF Mk3, Aut Vi
SAB 202 SM, Man Vi
SAB 202 SF, Man Vi ** *
245 ALL NONE
SAB 202 SM, Aut Vi NO FACT 0%
SAB 202 SF, Aut Vi
SAB 202 LM, Man Vi
SAB 202 LF, Man Vi ** *
317 ALL NONE
SAB 202 LM, Aut Vi NO FACT 0%
SAB 202 LF, Aut Vi
SAB 283 L 314
Not Not Not Not
SAB 283 E 391
relevant relevant relevant relevant
SAB 355 L 350
SAB 330 S 262
Not Not Not Not
SAB 330 L 371
relevant relevant relevant relevant
SAB 330 E 480

* If another value than the factory set value of 0% is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.
Therefore, only insert a value different from 0% after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.

44/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

** If another value than NO is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.

Therefore, only insert a value different from No after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm

0178-445 - ENG 45/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration

46/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
3. Alarms and Warnings
Analog alarms and warnings
ALARM and WARNING limits can be set sepa-
rately as described in section Changing the set
values.
UNISAB II does not check whether ALARM and
WARNING limits have been interchanged by a
mistake (eg if warning limit for high discharge
pressure is set higher than the alarm limit). Con-
sequently, during adjustments check that the
settings are correct.
If a warning limit is exceeded, the red light diode
above the D key will begin to flash slowly, and
the warning relay will be activated. The reason for
the warning can be seen in the picture WARNING,
which also shows whether there are several si-
0178_428_en.fm
multaneous warnings.
Note that in case of warning, a limiter might be ac-
tive as described in section Limiting functions.
When the warning disappears, it is automatically
removed from the picture WARNING and the re-
lay returns to its normal position.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
In case an alarm limit is exceeded, the compres-
sor will stop immediately. The red light diode
above the D key will start to flash quickly. In the
picture ALARM the reason for the alarm can be
read, and at the same time the alarm relay will
change its position.
The alarm relay works by connecting the
alarm/common switch during alarm and by dis-
connecting it once the alarm is reset.
The picture ALARM also shows the exact time of
the alarm. See also under Diagnosis.
The alarm is reset by pressing the D key, and the
warning and alarm relays will return to their nor-
mal position. However, if the alarm value is still
outside the limit, the red light diode will continue to
flash. When the situation has returned to normal,
the D key must be pressed once more,
The set values for high and low alarms as well as
the factory values are stated in the following ta-
bles 1-5. These are followed by explanatory
notes.
47/222
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Table 1
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels
Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Suction pressure High alarm - - -

(bar) High warning 1.5 9.0 5.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 6.0 1.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 6.0 1.0 3+4+5

Discharge pressure High alarm 4.0 24.0 16.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 15.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5

Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 4.0 2+7

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 2.5 2+7
SAB Mk 1 compressors

Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 0.0 6.0 0.0 2+9

Calculated value Low alarm 0.0 5.0 0.0 2+9
SAB Mk 2 compressors

Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.0 6.0 1.5 2+9

Calculated value Low alarm 0.5 5.0 1.2 2+9
SAB Mk 3, Mk 4 compres-
sors Set point 1 0.0 10.0 2.5 21
SAB 202, 283, 330, 355 Set point 2 0.0 10.0 4.0 21
FV 19, SV 24/26, FV 24/26

Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 2.0 2+9+17

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 1.5 2+9+17
VMY Mk 2-2.5 compressor

Oil pressure(bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 4.0 2+9

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 3.0 2+9
VMY Mk 3 compressors Set point 1 0.0 10.0 5.5 22
Set point 2 0.0 10.0 7.0 22

Oil pressure (bar) Low warning 1.5 6.0 2.0 2+9

Calculated value Low alarm 1.0 5.0 1.5 2+9
SAB 80 Set point 1 0.0 10.0 0.5 20
Set point 2 0.0 20.0 16.0 20

Diff. pressure High alarm 0.0 1.5 1.0 2+11

across oil filter (bar) Low warning 0.0 1.3 0.7 2+11
Calculated value
All types but SAB 80

Diff. pressure High alarm 0.0 2.5 1.6 2+11+19

across oil filter (bar) High warning 0.0 2.2 1.4 2+11+19
Calculated value
SAB80

48/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Table 2
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated temperatures

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Discharge temp. High alarm 60.0 130.0 100.0 1+6

(°C) High warning 50.0 120,0 90.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -

Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 80.0 60.0 2+7

(°C) High warning 30.0 70.0 55.0 2+7
Low warning 10.0 50.0 25.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 40.0 20.0 2+7

Brine temperature High alarm -60.0 100,0 60.0 1+6

(°C) High warning -60.0 100.0 50.0 1+6
Low warning -100.0 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -100.0 100.0 2.0 1+6

Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7+12

(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7+12
0178_428_en.fm

Low warning 0.0 40.0 2.0 2+7+10

Calculated value Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10

Disch. gas superheat Low warning 5.0 40.0 10.0 2+7+10

(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value

4-20 m Auxiliary input signal

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Auxiliary input High alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

0178-445 - ENG 49/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Table 3
Reciprocating compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels
Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Suction pressure High alarm - - -

(bar) High warning 1.5 9.0 5.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 6.0 2.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 6.0 1.5 3+4+5

Discharge pressure High alarm 4.0 24.0 16.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 15.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5

Intermediatepressure High alarm 4.0 24.0 7.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 22.0 6.0 1+6
For two-stage Low warning -1.0 10.0 -1.0 1+6+16
compressors only Low alarm -1.0 10.0 -1.0 1+6+16

Oil pressure (bar) High alarm 5.0 7.0 6.0 2+5+16

High warning 5.0 7.0 5.5 2+5
Low warning 0.5 5.0 4.0 2+5+14
Calculated value Low alarm 0.5 5.0 3.5 2+5+14

Table 4
Reciprocating compressors
Measured and calculated temperatures
Measuring Min Max Factory Note
Discharge temp. High alarm 60.0 155.0 125.0 1+6
(°C) High warning 50.0 155.0 120.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -
Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 105.0 80.0 2
(°C) High warning 30.0 105.0 75.0 2
Low warning 0.0 50.0 30.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 40.0 25.0 2+7
Brine temperature High alarm -60.0 100.0 60.0 1+6
(°C) High warning -60.0 100.0 50.0 1+6
Low warning -100.0 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -100.0 100.0 2.0 1+6
Intermediate gas High alarm 50.0 155.0 100.0 2+7
temperature (°C) High warning 50.0 120.0 95.0 2+7
For two-stage Low warning -20.0 50.0 4.0 2+7
compressors only Low alarm -20.0 50.0 2.0 2+7

50/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7
(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7
Low warning 0.0 40.0 4.0 2+7+13
Calculated value Low alarm 0.0 40.0 2.0 2+7+13
Disch. gas superheat Low warning 5.0 40.0 10.0 2+7+10
(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value

4-20 m Auxiliary input signal

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Auxiliary input High alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

Table 5
Reciprocating compressors HPO/HPC
Measured and calculated pressure levels and
temperatures
Measuring Min Max Factory Note
0178_428_en.fm

Suction pressure High alarm - - -

(bar) High warning 1.5 25.0 10.0 3+4+5
Low warning -1.0 25.0 3.5 3+4+5
Low alarm -1.0 25.0 2.5 3+4+5

Discharge pressure High alarm 4.0 40.0 35.0 1+6

(bar) High warning 3.0 40.0 33.0 1+6
Low warning - - -
Low alarm -1.0 -1.0 -1.0 1+5

Oil pressure High alarm 5.0 7.0 6.0 2+7

(bar) High warning 5.0 7.0 5.5 2+7
Low warning 0.5 5.0 4.0
Calculated value Low alarm 0.5 5.0 3.5

High diff. pressure- High alarm - - 26.0 1+15

Pc - Pe (bar) High warning - - 25.2
Calculated value

Discharge temperature High alarm 60.0 170.0 160.0 1+6

(°C) High warning 50.0 170.0 155.0 1+6
Low warning -65.0 -65.0 -65.0
Low alarm - - -

Oil temperature High alarm 40.0 105.0 95.0 2

(°C) High warning 30.0 105.0 90.0 2
Low warning 0.0 70.0 55.0 2+7
Low alarm 0.0 70.0 50.0 2+7

0178-445 - ENG 51/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Water temperature High alarm -20 100.0 75.0 1+6

(°C) High warning -20 100.0 70.0 1+6
Low warning -20 100.0 4.0 1+6
Low alarm -20 100.0 2.0 1+6

Suction gas superheat High alarm 6.0 120.0 110.0 2+7

(°C) High warning 5.0 120.0 100.0 2+7
Low warning 0.0 40.0 4.0 2+10+13
Calculated value Low alarm 0.0 40.0 2.0 2+10+13

Disch. gas superheat Low warning 5.0 40.0 10.0 2+7+10

(°C) Low alarm 0.0 40.0 0.0 2+7+10
Calculated value

4-20 m Auxiliary input signal

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Auxiliary input High alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

(4-20 mA) High warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low warning -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18
Low alarm -999.9 999.9 0.0 3+18

Notes: Note 9 Alarm monitoring 45 sec delayed af-

Note 1 The alarm cannot be switched off un- ter compressor start.
til the problem has been solved. Note 10 A setting of 0.0 impedes monitoring.
Note 2 The alarm can be switched off imme- Note 11 Delay of 300 sec, regardless of when
diately (RESET key). limits are exceeded.
Note 3 The alarm is switched off automati- Note 12 The compressor must have been
cally. above 5% capacity. Below 5% ca-
Note 4 The safety limits can be entered in pacity monitoring is impeded.
bar or °C/R. Note 13 Alarm monitoring 15 sec delayed af-
Note 5 Alarm monitoring active when digital ter compressor start.
output "compressor starting signal" Note 14 Delay of 60 sec, regardless of when
has been selected. limits are exceeded.
Note 6 Alarm monitoring always active - ex- Note 15 Only applies to HPO and HPC com-
cept when "BLOCKED" has been se- pressors.
lected in picture COMPRESSOR
Note 16 Alarm monitoring 20 sec delayed af-
CTRL MODE.
ter compressor start.
Note 7 Alarm monitoring 300 sec delayed
Note 17 For VMY Mk 2-2.5, calculate the fol-
after compressor start.
lowing (see Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure =
Note 8 Alarm monitoring 180 sec delayed Oil pressure 3 (after oil filter) - Dis-
after compressor start. charge pressure 2. For all other

52/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
compressor types (except for SAB
80, see Note 20), calculate the fol-
lowing: Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3
(after oil filter) - Suction pressure 1 .
Note 18 The limits are not active until AUX.
INPUT SIGNAL has been selected in
the menu CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
Note 19 For SAB 80 the differential pressure
across the oil filter is calculated as
follows (see Fig. 3.1): Oil filter diff.
pressure = Discharge pressure 2 -
Oil pressure 4 (after oil filter).
The shown oil filter pressure will thus
be 0.1 to 0.7 bar higher than the ac-
tual pressure loss across the filter
due to the pressure loss across the
oil separator and the oil cooler.
0178_428_en.fm
The maximum allowed pressure
drop across the oil filter is 1.2 bar.
Consequently, the warning limit
should be set between 0.8 and 1.4
bar or lower. The alarm limit should
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
be set between 1.1 and 1.7 bar or
lower.
Note 20: Set points 1 and 2 are used for alarm
monitoring of the mechanical oil
pump, cf description of the alarm un-
der "Oil pump error" in section Other
Alarms. For SAB 80, the oil pressure
is calculated as follows (see
Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure = Oil pressure
3 (after pump) - Suction pressure 1.
Note 21: The set points are used for control-
ling the oil pump. When the pressure
falls below set point 1, the oil pump
will start. When the pressure ex-
ceeds set point 2 for 60 seconds, the
oil pump will stop.
Note 22: The set points are used for control-
ling the full flow pump. When the
pressure falls below set point 1, the
full flow pump will start. When the
pressure exceeds set point 2 for 60
seconds, the full flow pump will stop.
53/222
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Fig. 3.1

SAB 80

Oil
Oil filter separator

Oil pump Compressor

Oil cooler

Others

Oil
Oil filter separator

Oil pump
Compressor

Oil cooler

Suction pressure Discharge pressure

Oil pressure Oil pressure 2

(before compressor) (between pump and filter)

Suction gas superheat, alarm
The superheat alarm is an alarm which in many
cases will protect the compressor against liquid
strokes. However, there are many aspects which
may affect superheating for which reason this
alarm must not be considered as full protection
against liquid strokes.
If the superheat falls below the set value, the com-
pressor will stop on the relay. However, on R717
pump circulation plants with a short distance be-
tween liquid separator and compressor, the suc-
tion gas superheat may drop below 0 K during
normal operation.

54/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
In such cases adjust LOW ALARM to 0, thus
making it inactive.
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA)
The alarm and warning limits are activated when
AUX. INPUT SIGNAL has been selected under
CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
Other alarms and warnings
Oil system error (screw compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that the oil float switch
is not activated within the time set in the timer OIL
FLOW during prelubrication; or that there is a
drop-out on the oil float switch for a longer period
than the one set in the timer NO OIL during oper-
ation.
0178_428_en.fm
Capacity error (screw compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that the capacity slide
is not below 5% within the time set in the timer
SLIDE MAX at compressor stop; or that the slide
- during operation - has not moved within 30 mins,
although the regulator is to regulate up or down
and the output signal from the regulator is above
20%; or that the slide - in connection with auto-
matic setting of variable zero point - cannot reach
the position corresponding to calculated or adjust-
ed zero point (ie positive read capacity) before the
expiry of the timer "cap.negative".
1) If the compressor is set on "MAN" or "AU-
TO" and in operation, and the slide does not
react to the regulating signal within 30 mins,
a warning will be issued. The compressor
does not stop.
2) If the compressor is set on "REMOTE" and
in operation, and the slide does not react to
the regulating signal within 30 mins, an
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
alarm will be issued. The compressor will
stop.
3) If the compressor is REMOTE CONTROL-
LED by a PC/PLC-system, a warning will
be issued as well. The monitoring is possi-
ble by means of a 4-20 mA signal in the aux.
input or via communication.
The reason for the difference between situ-
ation 1) and 2) is: If the system runs in se-
quence - REMOTE (MULTISAB), the com-
pressor must be stopped to start any subse-
quent compressors in the sequence.
When a compressor is remote controlled (3)
it is not a part of the sequence - REMOTE
(MULTISAB) system - thus stopping this
compressor will not start up subsequent
compressors.
PMS error
If the control is to start the compressor and conse-
quently adjusts the output START REQUEST
(PMS) to ON, the input START REQUEST OK
must be set on ON within the time set in the timer
PMS FEEDBACK - or the alarm will be activated.
No starting permission
The reason for the warning is that the regulator in
REMOTE/MULTISAB cannot start this compres-
sor, even though the regulator demands more ca-
pacity and this compressor is the next in line to
start. The reason is that AUTO START has not
been configured to YES, or the input EXTERNAL
STARTING PERMISSION-NORMAL STOP is not
ON.
Compressor motor error
The reason for the warning is that feedback from
the motor is not set/does not disappear within the
time set in the timer MOTOR START when the
55/222
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
compressor motor is started/stopped (ie the out-
put compressor start is activated/deactivated), or
that feedback from the motor disappears even
briefly during operation.
The alarm may also occur at compressor start if
the emergency stop or an optional high pressure
control has been activated.
Compressor motor overload
The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set
in the timer CURR OVERL, a motor current has
been measured continually. This current exceeds
the highest of the set point values that have been
set in SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 for MO-
TOR CURR.
Discharge pressure, overload
The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set
in the timer DISCH.PRES, OVERLOAD, a dis-
charge pressure level has been measured contin-
ually. This pressure level exceeds the warning
limit for high discharge pressure.
High motor temperature
The reason for the alarm is that the input THER-
MISTOR is open, ie the load on the input is above
3990 Ω.
Oil pump error (screw compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that feedback from the
oil pump motor is not set/does not disappear with-
in the time set in the timer OIL PUMP M. when the
compressor starts/stops (ie the output oil pump
start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback
from the motor disappears even briefly during op-
eration.
The alarm functions as a warning during opera-
tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been
completed.
56/222
Oil pump error (SAB 80)
The reason for the alarm is that the differential
pressure across the mechanical oil pump is too
low, ie lower than 0.5 Bar. This value can be set
as set point 1 for the oil pressure.
The alarm is delayed 45 seconds after compres-
sor start (same timer as for "low oil pressure").
The alarm is only activated when the discharge
pressure is lower than 16 Bar. This value can be
set as set point 2 for the oil pressure.
At a discharge pressure level of approx 16 Bar,
the pump cannot be expected to generate a posi-
tive relative pressure because of the shunt valve.
There is therefore no alarm surveillance of the dif-
ferential pressure across the oil pump.
Full flow pump error (screw
compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that feedback of the
full flow pump motor is not set/does not disappear
within the time set in the timer FULL FLOW M,
when the motor starts/stops (ie the output full flow
pumps start is activated/deactivated), or that
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
during operation.
The alarm functions as a warning during opera-
tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been
completed.
Cooling fan error
The alarm will be activated when feedback from
the electrical cooling fan motor is not set/disap-
pears within the time limit set in the timer FULL
FLOW M. when the motor is started/stopped (ie
the cooling fan is activated/deactivated), or when
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
during operation.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that suction gas super-
heat has not exceeded the value set in SET
POINT 1 before the timer RECT. DISABL has ex-
pired, although the OIL RECTIFIER has been set
and the compressor is running.
Wrong starting number in sequence
The reason for the warning is that two or more
compressors have got the same starting number
and the same system number.
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM
The reason for the alarm is that it has become im-
possible to read and write in the serial EPROM
(EEPROM) fitted on the CPU card, ie the serial
EPROM is either missing or defective.
0178_428_en.fm
Limiting suction pressure
The warning indicates that the suction pressure
limiter is active, ie the suction pressure is within
the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
Limiting discharge pressure
The warning indicates that the discharge pressure
limiter is active, ie the discharge pressure is within
the limiter neutral zone or above the warning limit.
Limiting brine temperature
The warning indicates that the brine temperature
limiter is active, ie the brine temperatureis within
the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
Limiting hot water
The warning indicates that the hot water tempera-
ture limiter is active, ie the hot water temperature
is within the limiter neutral zone or above the
warning limit.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Limiting discharge temperature
The warning indicates that the discharge pipe
temperature limiter is active. See section Limiting
functions, High discharge pipe temperature.
No communication to Chiller
The alarm/warning will only be activated if
UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller con-
trol, ie as SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.
The alarm will only be activated if the communica-
tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
disappears for a longer period than the one set in
the timer NO CHILLER.
Chiller, alarm from Chiller
The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is
configured as part of a Chiller control, ie as
SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.
The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con-
nected Chiller goes off.
Watch the oil pressure
The warning will appear if the oil pump for oil
charging is started by means of the picture
TIMERS I OIL CHARGING
and the compressor is in operation at the same
time.
Vi position error
The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is
configured for automatic Vi regulation, ie
SETUP I CONFIG I VOLUME RATIO = AUTO
The alarm indicates that the display of capacity in
connection with automatic Vi regulation is incor-
rect. The real capacity of the compressor is lower
than the one shown in the display.
57/222
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Evolution, alarm from PLC The alarm will only be activated if there is no com-
munication between UNISAB II and the connect-
Evolution, warning from PLC ed PLC.

The alarm/warning will only appear if UNISAB II is

configured as part of an Evolution control, ie as
SETUP I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I
PORT 1 = EVOLUTION XXX
The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con-
nected PLC goes off.
Evolution, no communication to PLC
The alarm will only appear if UNISAB II is config-
ured as part of an Evolution control, ie as SETUP
I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I PORT 1 =
EVOLUTION XXX
Fig. 3.2
Low lubricating pressure monitoring
(screw compressor)
The reason for this alarm is that the differential
pressure across the compressor and thus the ef-
fective lubricating pressure is too low. The differ-
ential pressure is calculated in the following way:
measured oil pressure - 1.1 x suction pressure.
The differential pressure must be higher that the
set alarm limit for low oil pressure, see the draw-
ing below. A warning will be issued after 25 sec-
onds and an alarm after 145 seconds.

LOW LUBRICATING PRESSURE

Pomeasured - 1.1 x
A P suc < lim A
t1 > 25 sec
yes
WARNING
yes

Pomeasured = Measured oil

pressure
No lim A = Alarm for low oil pres-
sure
LOW LUBRICATING
PRESSURE

No t1 > 145 sec ALARM

Yes
RESET
t1 = 0

No
t1 = 145 sec fixed

58/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Table 6
Identification numbers for alarms / warnings
This is a list of alarms and warnings with identification numbers for both screw and reciprocating compres-
sors.
Designation Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id

Low suction pressure Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 31

High suction pressure Warn only Warn only 32

Low suction gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 33

High suction gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 34

Low discharge pressure Alrm only Alrm only 35

High discharge pressure Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 36

High discharge temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 37

Low oil pressure (differential pressure) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 38

Low brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 39

Low discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 40

0178_428_en.fm

Low oil temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 41

High oil temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 42

High oil filter differential pressure Warn + alrm 43

Oil system error ( oil flow switch ) Alrm only 44

Capacity error Warn + alrm 1) 45

Compressor motor overload Alrm only Alrm only 46

Compressor motor error/emergency stop/HP Alrm only Alrm only 47

Oil pump error Warn + alrm 2) 4) 48

High motor temperature (thermistor) Alrm only Alrm only 49

PMS error Alrm only Alrm only 55

No starting permission Warn only Warn only 56

High differential pressure (Pc - Pe) Warn + alrm 3) 57

High brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 58

High oil pressure Warn + alrm 59

High intermed. pressure Warn + alrm 60

Low intermed. pressure Warn + alrm 61

Full flow pump error Warn + alrm 2) 62

0178-445 - ENG 59/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Designation Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id

63

Oil rectifier error Warn only 64

Wrong starting number in sequence Warn only Warn only 65

Error in diagnosis - EEPROM Alrm only Alrm only 66

Low auxiliary input signal (univ. reg.) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 67

High auxiliary input signal (univ. reg) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 68

Low discharge gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 69

Discharge gas overload Alrm only Alrm only 70

Evolution, alarm from PLC Alrm only Alrm only 71

Evolution, no communication to PLC Alrm only Alrm only 72

Limiter, suction pressure Warn only Warn only 73

Limiter, discharge pressure Warn only Warn only 74

Limiter, brine temperature Warn only Warn only 75

Limiter, hot water Warn only Warn only 76

Evolution, warning from PLC Warn only Warn only 77

Limiter, discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 78

Watch the oil pressure Warn only 79

Common alarm from Chiller Alrm only Alrm only 80

Chiller, no communication to Chiller Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 81

Cooling fan error Alrm only 82

Vi position error Alrm only 83

Lube press Warn + alarm 84

1) May occur as Warning in MAN and AUTO.
2) Alarm at prelubrication. Warning during operation.
3) Applies only to HPO/HPC.
4) The alarm LOW OIL PUMP PRESSURE DURING OPERATION applies to the SAB 80. The alarm is only activated at a discharge pres-
sure level below 16 Bar.

60/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

4. Timers
UNISAB II includes a number of timer functions reached at that particular moment. In this way it is
under the menu SETUP I TIMERS I . possible to know for how long the compressor has
been running since the last operating period.
When the compressor is restarted, the counter be-
TIMERS
1 TIMERS
gins from 0.
2 TIMER SETUP
3 SERVICE TIMERS 4. DATE - TIME - I
4 DATE-TIMER
This picture shows:
5 OIL CHARGING
6 MOTOR FAN TIME The time in hours
7 P BAND FACTOR MIN The time in minutes
8 TRANSFER SEC The time in seconds
9 TAKE - OVER DAY Date
MONTH Month
1. TIMERS - I YEAR Year
This picture includes all the timers and shows Must be set correctly in order for the alarms to be
which timers are activated (they are counting stored with the correct time. This function is pro-
0178_429_en.fm

down). vided with a battery back-up.

2.TIMER SETUP - I 5. OIL CHARGING - I (screw

In this picture the set values of the timers can be compressor)
changed. The timers and their functions appear Provided that the compressor is fitted with a pump
from the following tables for screw compressors for oil charging, this can be started in the picture
and reciprocating compressors respectively. OIL CHARGING. This picture shows:
Some of these timers can be changed using the
keyboard whereas others are fixed. The tables START OIL PUMP NO
also include the factory set values. TIMER 0 sec

3. SERVICE COUNTER - I To start the pump, proceed as follows:

Place the cursor on TIMER with K and use G for
ON TIME 00 HOUR
parameter changing. Set the time that the pump is
SINCE START 0 sec
to run and place the cursor on START OIL PUMP
On time J which is changed to YES with G and J . Con-
Indicates the total operating time of the compres- firm by pressing G.
sor. The pump will now start and run for the set period.
Since start In case the pump is to stop before time expiry,
Shows how long time the compressor has been select NO in the top line. The pump will now stop
running since it was last started. When stopping and the time drop to 0.
the compressor, the counter will stay on the value

0178-445 - ENG 61/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency To start the cooling fan manually, carry out the fol-
controlled screw compressor) lowing:
If the compressor is fitted with an electrical cooling Place the cursor on TIMER SP with K and press
fan for cooling the compressor motor, this can be G to change the parameter. Set the fan running
started manually in the picture COOLING FAN. time and place the cursor on START COOLING
The function is only available on frequency con- FAN. Select YES with G,and J . Enter setting
trolled compressors. with G .
The picture shows the following: The cooling fan will now start and operate for the
set running time.
START COOLING FAN NO To stop the cooling fan before the end of the
TIMER SP 10 sec running time, select NO in the upper line. The fan
TIMER 0 sec will now stop and the time be reset to 0.

62/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

Table 7 - Screw compressors

No Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-
able

1 Start-start delay 1200 600 3600 Sec Yes

2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

4 Stop delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

6 Slide max 300 60 600 Sec Yes

7 Prelub1)/2)/3)/4)/5)/6) 10/60/0/6/50 0 120 Sec Yes

8 Oil flow1)/2)/3)/4)/5) 600/90/60/120/600 -- -- Sec No

9 Oil flow delay 1)/2)/3) 50/0/20 -- -- Sec No

10 No oil/flow 1)/2) 10/2/60 - - Sec No

11 Lubrication time/flow 1)/2) 60/300 - - Sec No

12 Diff press OK 60 - - Sec No

0178_429_en.fm

13 Oil press low 1)/2) 45/300 - - Sec No

14 Filter diff high 300 - - Sec No

15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No

16 Oil temp high 300 - - Sec No

17 Superheating low 300 - - Sec No

18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No

19 Disch press overload 300 - - Sec No

20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No

21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes

22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes

23 F.F. Pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes

24 Oil pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes

25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes

26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes

28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes

29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No

0178-445 - ENG 63/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

No Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-

able

30 Cap. negative 10000 60 20000 Sec Yes

31 Start unload 15 0 60 Sec Yes

32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes

33 Lubricating pressure 145 - - Sec No

34 Vi-pause 60 - - Sec No

64/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

Table 8 - Reciprocating compressors

No Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-
able

1 Start-start delay 1200 600 3600 Sec Yes

2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

4 Stop delay 300 5 3600 Sec Yes

5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

6 Delay up 60 5 1200 Sec Yes

7 Delay down 60 5 1200 Sec Yes

8 Take-over max 0 0 3600 Sec Yes

9 Take-over delay 300 300 300 Sec No

10 Intermediate pressure low 20 - - Sec No

11 Filter diff. high 300 -- -- Sec No

12 Not used -- -- -- -- --
0178_429_en.fm

13 Oil pressure low 60 - - Sec No

14 Oil pressure high 20 - - Sec No

15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No

16 Oil temp high 0 - - Sec No

17 Superheating low 15 - - Sec No

18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No

19 Disch pressure overload 300 - - Sec No

20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No

21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes

22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes

23 Oil cool on 60 60 1500 Sec Yes

24 Oil return 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes

26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes

28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes

29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No

0178-445 - ENG 65/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

No Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-

able

30 Not used - - - - -

31 Not used - - - - -

32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes

33 Not used - - - - -

34 Not used

Timer description Used only in case of suction pressure regulation.

Screw compressors
1. Start-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass from
one compressor start to the next. If the compres-
sor stops before the timer has counted down to 0,
the timer will block restart.
2. Stop-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass be-
fore the compressor can be restarted after stop.
This function is not used in MANUAL mode.
3. Start delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE,
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated
number of seconds.
4. Stop delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE
and the compressor is below 5% slide stop posi-
tion, the timer will start counting down and stop
the compressor at 0.
5. Suction ramp
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al-
lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-
tion is active as long as the compressor is working
itself down to its normal working point. When this
has been reached, the compressor will be regulat-
ed according to the set regulating values.
If the value is set at 0, this function is disconnect-
ed.
6. Slide max
At compressor stop the capacity slide will move
towards minimum position. In case it fails to get
below 5% within the set time, an error message
will be issued.
If UNISAB II tries to move the slide during opera-
tion, and the slide refuses to move within the set
time, an error message will appear.
7. Prelubrication
When starting compressors with prelubrication
pumps, the prelubrication time is calculated from
the time when the oil float issues a signal.
1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.
2) For SAB 163 Mk1.
3) For SV 10/20, FV 10/20, SAB 110 SR/LR,
SAB 128 HR and SAB 163 HR.
4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and
SAB 330 B
5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster,
which can be selected in the CONFIG
menu. HP means Booster = NO).
6) For Rotatune compressors the time must be
changed from 10 sec. to 0 sec.

66/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

8. Oil flow after the desired differential pressure has been

When prelubrication is initiated, a signal must be reached.
issued from the float switch before the timer ex- 13. Oil pressure low
pires; otherwise an error message appears.
During start the alarm for low oil pressure is de-
1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3. layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
2) For SAB 163 Mk1. mal operation.

3) For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk2, SAB Mk3, VMY,
SAB 80, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20.
4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and
SAB 330 B 2. For SAB 163 Mk 1

5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster, 14. Filter diff. high
which can be selected in the CONFIG During start and operation the alarm for high filter
menu. HP means Booster = NO). differential pressure is delayed for the stated time.

9. Oil flow switch delay, start 15. Oil temp. low

When starting a compressor, a time delay ensures
that the oil float has time to lift.
1. For SAB Mk 2 110/128/163 and SAB 80.
0178_429_en.fm
During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.

16. Oil temp. high

2. For compressors with prelubrication delay =
0 sec. During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
3. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 mal operation.
10. No oil/flow 17. Superheating low
During operation the oil float is allowed to be dis- During start the alarm for low superheating is de-
connected only for the period stated. layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
1. For SAB and VMY compressors. mal operation.
2. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 18. Superheating high
3. For GSV/RWF During start the alarm for high superheating is de-
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
11. Lubrication time/flow
mal operation.
After start-up of compressors with prelubrication
pump, the pump will run for the time stated after 19. Disch. pressure, overload
compressor start. If the discharge pressure is higher than the warn-
ing limit in the time stated, the compressor will
1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3, SV
stop and an error message will appear.
10/20 and FV 10/20
See also Limiters.
2. For SAB 163 Mk1.
20. Current overload
12. Diff. pressure OK
If the motor current is higher than the set point in
For VMY Mk3, SAB Mk3, SAB 202, SV 10/20 and
the time stated, the compressor will stop and an
FV 10/20 the oil pump will run for the stated time
error message will appear.

0178-445 - ENG 67/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
See also Limiters.
21. Motor start
When the compressor starts, the motor guard
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if
not, an error message will appear.
The green light diode above the starting key A will
flash until feedback has been received whereup-
on the light will be steady.
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback
After the control has issued a starting request, it
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
not, an error message will appear.
23. F. F. Pump start
In case the motor guard of the full flow pump has
failed to issue a feedback within the stated time af-
ter the starting signal, an error message will ap-
pear.
24. Oil pump start
In case the motor guard of the oil pump has failed
to issue a feedback within the stated time after the
starting signal, an error message will appear.
25. Oil rectifier start
Whenever the compressor starts, this timer will be
activated and start counting down. When 0 has
been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
will be activated.
26. Oil rectifier delay
If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will close.
Once the superheating rises above this limit
again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
valve opens.
27. Oil rectifier disable
If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
down. Provided the superheating still remains be-
low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a warn-
ing will be issued to a superior computer.
68/222
28. Start high pressure
On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
started by force by activating the input
External starting permission, normal stop.
The start will be delayed for the set number of sec-
onds.
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in
the sequence will start and the system will now
operate normally.
29. No Chiller
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
control, the timer will ensure that communication
between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
does not disappear for a period longer period than
the set time. If this happens, both UNISAB II and
UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.
30. Cap. negative
When the compressor is started, the slide must
move to the position corresponding to the set zero
point (ie positive read capacity) as quickly as pos-
sible before the expiry of the cap. negative timer.
Otherwise an error message will be issued. The
cap. negative timer counts down each second by
the value: (corrected capacity)2/5, where corrected
capacity may be negative values between -0 and
-30%, ie the timer will count down each second by
a factor between 1 and 180.
Each time the slide moves above 0% capacity, the
timer will stop.
The timer is reset and restarted, as soon as the
slide moves below -2% corrected capacity.
31. Unloaded start
The timer is used in connection with the compres-
sors FV 17/19. When the compressor motor is
started, a by-pass solenoid valve for oil discharge
will open for the time set.
The timer is used in connection with the compres-
sors FV 24/26. When the compressor motor is
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

started and stopped, the slide capacity down sole-
noid valve will open for the time set.
32. Low suction pressure
During start-up and operation the alarm for low
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
od of time.
33. Lubricating pressure
During start-up and operation the alarm for low
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
od of time. A warning is issued after 25 seconds.
34. Vi-pause
The timer is used in connection with GST com-
pressors, which have a three-stage automatic
regulation of the volume ratio, 2.2-3.5-5.0. Before
switching from one Vi-step to another, the actual
Vi ratio for the compressor must have been
present for at least the indicated time other wise
0178_429_en.fm
the timer will start counting down and stop the
compressor at 0.
5. Suction ramp
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al-
lowed to lower its suction pressure1°C/R. If the
value is set for 0, this function will be disconnect-
ed.
6. Delay up
Indicates the time that passes between the load-
ing of stages at increasing capacity in AUTOMAT-
IC or REMOTE mode.
7. Delay down
Indicates the time that passes between the un-
loading of stages at decreasing capacity in AUTO-
MATIC or REMOTE mode.
8. Take-over max
Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this

the change of the Vi step will be cancelled.

instruction manual.
9. Take-over delay
Reciprocating compressors
Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this
1. Start-start delay instruction manual.
States the number of seconds that must pass from
one compressor starts to the next. If the compres- 10. Intermediate pressure low
sor stops before the timer has reached 0, the timer During start the alarm for low intermediate pres-
will block restart. sure is delayed for the stated time. No delay dur-
ing normal operation.
2. Stop-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass be- 11. Filter diff. high
fore the compressor can be restarted after stop. 1. SMC Mk4; during start-up and operation,
This function is not used in MANUAL mode. the warning for high oil filter differential pres-
sure is delayed for the indicated period of
3. Start delay time.
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE,
2. For SMC Mk3 and earlier versions, this tim-
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated
er is not used.
number of seconds.
12. Not used
4. Stop delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, 13. Oil pressure low
and the compressor is at its lowest capacity stage, During start and operation the alarm for low oil
pressure is delayed for the stated time.

0178-445 - ENG 69/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
14. Oil pressure high
During start the alarm for high oil pressure is de-
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.
15. Oil temperature low
During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.
16. Oil temp high
During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.
17. Superheating low
During start the alarm for low superheating is de-
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.
18. Superheating high
During start the alarm for high superheating is de-
layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-
mal operation.
19. Disch. pressure, overload
In case the discharge pressure is higher than the
warning limit within the stated time, the compres-
sor will stop.
20. Current overload
In case the motor current is higher than the set
point within the stated time, the compressor will
stop.
21. Motor start
When the compressor starts, the motor guard
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if
not, an error message will appear.
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback
After the control has issued a starting request, it
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
not, an error message will appear.
70/222
23. Oil cool on
At compressor stop the outlet for water cooling or
oil cooling will not close until after the set time has
run out.
24. Oil return
At compressor start the outlets for oil return are
not opened until after the set time has run out.
25. Oil rectifier start
Whenever the compressor starts, the timer will be
activated and start counting down. When 0 has
been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
will be activated.
26. Oil rectifier delay
If the suction gas superheating drops below set
point 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will
close. Once the superheating rises above this limit
again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
valve opens.
27. Oil rectifier disable
If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
down. Provided the superheating still remains be-
low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a war-
ning will be issued to a superior computer.
28. Start high pressure
On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
started by force by activating the input External
starting permission, normal stop. The start will
be delayed for the set number of seconds.
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in
the sequence will start and the system will now
operate normally.
29. No Chiller
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
control, this timer will ensure that the communica-
tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
does not disappear for a period longer than the set
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

time. If this occurs, both UNISAB II and Stop delay

UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm. If the value 0 is selected, the timer will start to
30. Not used count when the measured value of the regulator is
in the neutral zone.
31. Not used
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
32. Low suction pressure
count until the measured value of the regulator is
During start-up and operation the alarm for low
1% inside the proportional band below the neutral
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-
zone.
od of time.
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start
33. Not used
to count until the measured value of the regulator
34. Not used. is 100% inside the proportional band below the
neutral zone.
7. P BAND FACTOR - I Sp = Set point
In case of a screw compressor, the following Nz = Neutral zone
picture will appear: Pb = Proportional band
Example 1:
START DELAY 1 UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure reg-
0178_429_en.fm

STOP DELAY 0 ulation,

Start delay
Start delay can be changed in the range from 1 to
100. Stop delay can be changed in the range from
0 to 100. The function of these zones must be
seen in connection with the applied regulator (suc-
tion pressure, brine, etc).
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
count until the measured value of the regulator is
1% inside the proportional band above the neutral
zone.
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start
to count until the measured value of the regulator
is 100% inside the proportional band above the
neutral zone.
Whether 1% or 100% is selected, the timer - when
it is started - will count in seconds without exten-
sion (this is not the case with reciprocating com-
pressors, see next section).
Sp = -10 °C,
Nz = 2 K, Pb = 10 K,
START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 50.
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 30.
In the neutral zone and up to -4°C the compressor
will not be in operation. If the measured suction
pressure is a little higher than -4°C, the START
DELAY timer will start counting and the compres-
sor will start after 90 seconds. If necessary, a
compressor start can thus be delayed or blocked.
In the neutral zone and up to -14°C the compres-
sor will be in operation. If the measured suction
pressure is a little lower than -14°C and the capac-
ity slide is below 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will
start counting and the compressor will stop after
60 seconds.
Example 2:
UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure
change,
Sp = -20 °C,

0178-445 - ENG 71/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

Nz = 4K, Pb = 10 K, Each of these factors can be selected in the range

START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 10. 1-10.
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 0. In AUTO and REMOTE mode, the various
In the neutral zone and up to -17°C the compres- P BAND FACTORs are influencing the decision of
sor will not be in operation. If the measured suc- when to start or stop the compressor or, for recip-
tion pressure is a little higher than -17°C, the rocating compressors, when to engage or disen-
START DELAY timer will start to count and the gage another capacity stage.
compressor will start after 90 seconds. If neces- Basically, starting and stopping as well as engag-
sary, a compressor start can thus be delayed or ing and disengaging are delayed by the timers
blocked. START DELAY, STOP DELAY, DELAY UP and
As long as the measured suction pressure is in the DELAY DOWN. See section Timer description.
upper proportional band, the compressor will be in The relevant timers start as soon as the regulated
operation. If the measured suction pressure is a input (eg suction pressure) is just outside the neu-
little lower than -18°C and the capacity slide is be- tral zone.
low 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will start to count There is one P BAND FACTOR for each of these
and the compressor will stop after 60 seconds. timers.
In case of a reciprocating compressor, the fol- If the P BAND FACTOR is 1, the time delay will be
lowing picture will appear: the same no matter if the regulated input is just
outside the neutral zone or far outside the neutral
zone.
DELAY UP 1
DELAY DOWN 1 By selecting a P BAND FACTOR higher than 1
START DELAY 1 (up to 10), it is possible to have the timer run slow-
STOP DELAY 1 er when the regulated input is close to the neutral
zone as illustrated in the drawing.
Fig. 4.1

Timer step [sec]

PBF = P.Band Factor
Diff = Measuring value - Setpoint

PBF

1
Diff
-NZ 0 NZ PB
-PB

When the regulated input is outside the P band just outside the neutral zone (NZ), each count-
(PB), the timer will run at normal speed, as it is down will last one PBF second.
counting in seconds. When the regulated input is

72/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
In this way, a compressor start can be delayed or
blocked if there is no particular cooling require-
ment. However, if the deviation is large, the timer
will count down fast and start the compressor.
Example 1:
Suction pressure regulation has been selected.
The measured suction pressure equals the set
point. The compressor is stopped and ready to
start.
Set point Sp = -10°C/R
Nz = 2°C/R
Pb = 5°C/R
START DELAY = 60 sec
P BAND FACTOR START DELAY = 5.
When the measured suction pressure exceeds
-9°C/R, the START DELAY timer will begin to
count with an interval of 5 sec (P BAND FACTOR)
each time the value in the display counts one
0178_429_en.fm
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run
for 5 x 60 = 300 seconds.
Should the measuring value reach -6.5°C/R, the
counting interval will be 3 sec.
If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex-
ceeds -4°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in
seconds.
The resulting total delay will range between 60
and 300 seconds, after which the compressor will
start.
Example 2:
Discharge pressure regulation has been selected
on a reciprocating compressor. The measured
discharge pressure equals the set point. The com-
pressor is running at 100% capacity.
Set point Sp = 30°C/R
Nz = 2°C/R
Pb = 5°C/R
DELAY DOWN = 30 sec
P BAND FACTOR DELAY DOWN = 3.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
When the measured discharge pressure exceeds
31°C/R, the timer DELAY DOWN will begin to
count with an interval of 3 sec (P BAND FACTOR)
each time the value in the display counts one
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run
for 3 x 30 = 90 seconds.
Should the measuring value reach 33.5°C/R, the
counting interval will be 2 sec.
If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex-
ceeds 36°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in
seconds.
The resulting total delay will range between 30
and 90 seconds, after which the compressor will
disengage one capacity stage.
Special timers in connection with
MULTISAB
Reciprocating compressors
In the MULTISAB system which regulates and op-
timizes more than one compressor, there are a
number of factors attached to a TRANS-
FER/TAKE-OVER function between reciprocating
and screw compressors. These factors are de-
scribed in detail in section MULTISAB regulation.
The factors are found in the pictures:
8.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating
compressors
FACTOR DOWN 1
ZONE 15%
9.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating
compressors
FACTOR UP 1
FACTOR START 1
ZONE 15%
73/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

MULTISAB If MULTISAB is to function optimally, it is of vital

MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control
system, which is very useful when more compres-
sors are working together (eg connection to the
same suction line). With MULTISAB it is possible
to start, stop and capacity regulate compressors
according to the varying cooling requirements.
MULTISAB is a standard function in UNISAB II.
MULTISAB is described in detail in section MUL-
TISAB regulation.
MULTISAB is only able to work if all UNISAB II
units which are to participate in the distributed
control are physically connected via the Danbuss
communication network. The section Installation
of data communication cable describes how to
connect the units.
Fig. 4.2
importance that certain key parameters are se-
lected correctly by the user as explained in section
MULTISAB regulation. To understand the con-
tents of the MULTISAB pictures, the following key
parameters are described here: COMPR. NO,
SYSTEM NO, PREF. MASTER, START NO and
CONTROL MODE.
Always make sure that all UNISAB II units on a
network have different COMPR. NOs, ie two units
are not allowed to have the same COMPR. NO.
See section Configuration.
SYSTEM NO informs MULTISAB which com-
pressors are to work together. The drawing below
shows two examples.

SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
Compr. 1 Compr. 1

Suction line, subplant 1 SYSTEM NO

= 1 or 2
SYSTEM NO = 1
Compr. 2 Compr. 2

Common Multisab
Multisab network Suction main line 1
network
SYSTEM NO SYSTEM NO = 1
= 1 or 2
Suction main line 2
SYSTEM NO = 2
Compr. 3
Compr. 3

Suction line, subplant 2

SYSTEM NO
SYSTEM NO = 2 = 1 or 2
Compr. 4 Compr. 4

Separated compressor plants Common compressor plant

In the example to the left, two separate compres-
sor plants are connected on a common Danbuss
network. Here it is of vital importance that
• UNISAB No 1 has the same SYSTEMNO as
UNISAB No 2
• UNISAB No 3 has the same SYSTEM NO
as UNISAB No 4
• SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 1 and 2 differs
from SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 3 and 4.

74/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

In the example to the right, each of the four com-
pressors can be connected independently to any
of the two suction main lines. In this example is is
also important that SYSTEM NO is correct. How-
ever, it is particularly important that when chang-
ing the valve settings, the SYSTEM NO in the
UNISAB II units in question is changed according-
ly as this does not take place automatically.
START NO defines the priority of the compres-
sors with common SYSTEM NO. The unit with the
lowest START NO will be the first to start.
PREF. MASTER must be indentical for all units
with the same SYSTEM NO. See section Config-
uration. PREF. MASTER specifies whether it is
COMPR. NO or START NO which is to define
which UNISAB II is to be SYS CONTROLLER.
SYS CONTROLLER is responsible for the co-or-
dination of the involved units. It is the sensor of the
0178_429_en.fm
alarm condition may be due to a sensor error, re-
sulting in a change of SYS CONTROLLER and
thus of sensor.
In order for a compressor to become part of a
MULTISAB system, the above key parameters
must be set up. CONTROL MODE must be set for
REMOTE. In other words, by changing the CON-
TROL MODE, the user is able to include and ex-
clude the compressor from the MULTISAB sys-
tem. See section Compressor regulation.
The MULTISAB functions are found in the menu
SETUP I MULTISAB I
MULTISAB
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTR.

SYS CONTROLLER (eg suction pressure input)

which is used for the regulation. 1. MULTISAB STATE - I
If PREF. MASTER = #COMPR, the unit with the
lowest COMPR. NO will be SYS CONTROLLER START NO 1
except if the UNISAB II unit in question is shut off SYSTEM NO 1
or otherwise unable to communicate. In such cas- SYS. CONTROLLER 1
es the unit with the next COMPR. NO will take MAY START
over as SYS CONTROLLER.
Here START NO and SYSTEM NO can be adjust-
If PREF. MASTER = #START, the unit with the
ed in the range 1-14. Furthermore, SYS CON-
lowest START NO will be SYS CONTROLLER,
TROLLER shows which unit is the master as ex-
but only as long as it is available. If it is not avail-
plained above.
able, the unit with the next START NO will take
over as SYS CONTROLLER. A unit is not availa- In the fourth line of the picture, the MULTISAB
ble if it is shut off, not communicating, not in RE- status of the UNISAB II in question is shown. The
MOTE mode or in shutdown alarm condition. An status can be one of the following:

State Explanation

BLOCKED The compressor cannot (and is not going to) start MULTISAB now.

NOT MY TURN Another compressor must start before this one / there is no cooling requirement.

MAY START Starts when START DELAY expires as there is now a cooling requirement.

0178-445 - ENG 75/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

State Explanation

RUNS AT MAX CAP Must run at 100% capacity.

LEAD COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as master.

LAG COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as slave.

MAY STOP Is below 5% capacity, stops when STOP DELAY expires.

RUNS BY ITSELF Is the only compressor in the system that is in operation.

STOP RAMP UP Stops parallel operation, as master - only screw compr.

STOP RAMP DOWN Stops parallel operation, as slave - only screw compr.

2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I Control mode

Operating mode of compressor no 01. In this ex-
ample compressor no. 01 is in MANUAL mode.
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
Control mode be one of the following: STOPPED,
SYSTEM # 01
MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE.
START # 02
READY 0% SYSTEM #
SYSTEM NO of compressor no 01.
This picture makes it possible - from a UNISAB II
START #
unit - to see MULTISAB information about the oth-
START NO of compressor no 01.
er compressors in the communication network.
Status
COMPR. #
Compressor operating status of compressor no.
The number of the observed UNISAB II unit. In
01. Operating status can be one of the following:
this example it is compressor no 01.

State Explanation
READY UNISAB II is ready to start.
RUNNING Compressor in operation.
STARTING Compressor motor start-up.
SHUTDOWN In a state of alarm.
PAUSE Waiting for a timer to expire.
PRELUB Working on the prelubrication sequence.
CAP SLIDE DOWN Runs the slide down after stop.
RUNS AT OVERL. Motor current too high.
DISCHARGE LIM. Discharge pressure too high.
SUCTION LIM. Suction pressure too low.
STOPPED Compressor cannot start.

Capacity Capacity of compressor no 1.

76/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

The picture can of course be used for getting an NEXT

overall view of the MULTISAB operation of the The number of the compressor which is next in the
plant. starting sequence - (higher START NO)
It may also be used for testing whether the com- FOLLOWING
munication between the UNISAB II units on the The number of the compressor which follows the
network is working. In case there is no communi- next compressor in the starting sequence (an
cation to one of the UNISAB II units, the status even higher START NO).
field in line 4 will be replaced by a "?".
PARALLEL CAP
The percentage at which MULTISAB is going to
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I stop this compressor, when this compressor is
one of the two screw compressors that run in par-
PRECEDING 2 allel.
NEXT 3
OFFSET
FOLLOWING 0
PARALLEL CAP 45.0 % Can be set between 0.0% and -20.0%. The OFF-
OFFSET -10.0 % SET value is added to the calculation of PARAL-
LEL CAP. After entering an OFFSET value (not
This picture shows the numbers of the compres- 0), the PARALLEL CAP value will be reduced ac-
0178_429_en.fm

sors which come before and after this compressor
in the starting sequence and which can start. The
last two lines only apply to screw compressors.
PRECEDING
The number of the compressor that comes before
this compressor in the starting sequence - (lower
START NO).
cordingly. This means that the point at which the
lag (screw) compressor is stopped is reduced by
the OFFSET value. This may be useful when wa-
ter chillers are running in parallel as these units
may have a relatively better COP at part load
(heat transfer being better at part load). Note that
the OFFSET value is not changed by a FACTORY
RESET.

0178-445 - ENG 77/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers

78/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
5. Compressor regulation
Control mode
The compressor can be adjusted for different
modes of operation. These are found in SETUP I
CONTROL I .
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
STOPPED
When this picture is selected, the cursor will be
positioned in the top line. Press G and the cursor
moves to the second line.
Select the desired mode of operation with J K.
There are the following possibilities:
• STOPPED
• MANUAL
0178_430_en.fm
• AUTO
• REMOTE
STOPPED means that the compressor is blocked
and thus cannot start.
MANUAL means that the compressor only oper-
ates manually, ie it is not possible to change to an-
other mode by means of C .
The compressor can, however, be started with A
and stopped with B. Capacity is increased/de-
creased with E F.
AUTO means that the compressor runs in local
automatic operation according to the form of reg-
ulation chosen (suction pressure, brine, etc). It is
possible to change to MANUAL with C.
REMOTE means that the compressor works to-
gether with one or more compressors in a com-
mon MULTISAB control system.
Regulators
UNISAB II includes a number of compressor ca-
pacity regulators. In the modes AUTO and RE-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
MOTE, one (and only one) of these regulators is
responsible for adjusting the capacity according to
the cooling (or heating) requirements. Which reg-
ulator to use is specified in Pos. 3: CONTROL ON
in the menu CONFIG. See section Configuration.
CONTROL ON can be set to one of the following:
• SUCTION
• BRINE
• DISCHARGE
• HOT WATER
• EXT.COOL
• EXT.HEAT
Each regulator has its own set of parameters. This
means that when changing the CONTROL ON
setting from one regulator to another and back
again, the original parameters are kept.
The common regulator parameter set includes:
Set point (SP), Neutral zone (Nz) and Propor-
tional band (Pb or P Band). On screw compres-
sors PID parameters are also used. See section
PID controller below.
Set point is the pressure or the temperature de-
sired in the plant.
Neutral zone indicates how much the pressure or
the temperature is allowed to fluctuate in relation
to the Sp without the compressor changing its ca-
pacity. The set value of Nz is positioned symmet-
rically around the set point (Sp +/- 1/2 Nz).
Proportional band indicates how powerful the
regulating signal to the compressor capacity reg-
ulation is going to be, depending on the difference
between the desired value (Sp) and the actual val-
ue.
In case the measured value is just outside the Nz,
the regulating impulses will be very short, where-
as the regulating impules will be very long if the
79/222
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
measured value is outside the P Band. The P
Band is positioned symmetrically around Sp out-
side the Nz.
Fig. 5.1
rapidly up
Very slowly up
SP
P.Band
NZ
Very slowly down
rapidly down
Screw compressors
Screw compressors are capacity regulated (hy-
draulically or electrically) by moving the capacity
slide. This takes place via two digital outputs
which are controlled by UNISAB II, so that the
slide moves towards max or min capacity accord-
ing to demand. The setting is stageless from 0 to
100%. UNISAB II will usually pulse the digital out-
puts with a pulse/delay ratio. Consequently, a
constant up or down signal will rarely be given.
The capacity control must be seen as two PID
control loops.
The inner loop adjusts the slide position continu-
ously according to the manually or automatically
selected capacity set point. As long as this set
point is constant, the inner loop will ensure that
the capacity slide remains in this position, inde-
80/222
P.Band
Error signal
pendent of any other outside influence on the ca-
pacity slide.
When active, the outer loop will adjust the capac-
ity set point according to the selected control set
point and measured value, eg the suction pres-
sure set point and measurement. In MANUAL
mode, the outer loop is not active. In AUTO, the
outer loop is active according to the CONTROL
ON setting. See section Regulators.
The inner loop set point can also be controlled via
the external input (see section Set point control
with current input) or via the communication net-
work.
Inner loop parameters are set in picture SETUP I
CAPACITY I CAPACITY. The picture includes
the standard PID parameters and the points de-
scribed in section PID controller below. Addition-
ally the following parameters can be selected:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

• MIN PULSE is the shortest pulse that Outer loop parameters are set in the relevant pic-
UNISAB II will give on the relay output, eg it ture, eg SUCTION I SUCT. PRESS. The picture
takes time for a hydraulicvalve to open and includes the standard PID parameters and the
close, and for the hydraulic oil to move, so a points described in section PID controller below.
pulse shorter than about half a second The automatic Vi slide control works in the same
would have no effect and would only short- way as the inner loop. The parameters are availa-
en the service life of the valve and the relay. ble in picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION.
A longer MIN PULSE increases the service
life of the hardware, but it also makes the
PID controller
regulation less accurate.
On screw compressors a PID controller is used for
• RUN TIME is the approximate time it takes
capacity control and possible Vi control. The the-
for the capacity slide to move from minimum
ory of PID controllers is described in numerous
position to maximum position and vice versa
books on automatic control. Methods of optimiz-
at constant signal. Please note that RUN
ing the parameters are also included in these
TIME for the capacity slide may be reduced
books. The available parameters are described
by variable slide end stop etc where this is
briefly in the following.
relevant.
In the relevant picture, eg SUCTION I SUCT.
0178_430_en.fm

PRESS., the following data are included:

Name Description

ACTUAL SP. The set point which the PID controller works with at the moment.

SET POINT 1 User selected set point 1

SET POINT 2 User selected set point 2

NEUTRAL ZONE The neutral zone is a symmetrical area around ACTUAL SP. When the controlled val-
ue is inside the area, the controller will be passive. The purpose is to increase service
life of the output hardware (relays, valves, spindle motor, etc). However, with the PID
controller this is handled by MIN PULSE, so that the NEUTRAL ZONE should be set
for 0. A larger NEUTRAL ZONE makes the regulation less accurate.

PROP. BAND This parameter decides the total gain in the control loop, as the gain K=n / (PROP.
BAND) where n is a constant that depends on RUN TIME. Thus changing PROP.
BAND does not only affect the proportional term, but also the integral and differential
terms. Increasing PROP. BAND will give a slower response.

T. INT. Integral Time decides the gain of the integral term. A smaller T. INT means a larger
gain, ie the controller will try to reach the set point faster.

T. DIFF. Differential Time decides the gain of the differential term. A larger T. DIFF means a
larger gain. Normally select T. DIFF = 0 as it is then working as a PI controller.

P. PART This field shows the actual Proportional term calculated by the PID controller.

I. PART This field shows the actual Integral term calculated by the PID controller.

0178-445 - ENG 81/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
Name Description
D. PART This field shows the actual Differential term calculated by the PID controller
REG. OUTPUT The actual Regulator Output is the sum of P. PART, I. PART and D. PART.
PID regulator
With version 2.01, the PID regulator was intro-
duced to replace the previous “three-point I regu-
lator”. It is very important that the parameters ap-
pearing by a factory reset be used.
There are both an inner and an outer loop. As re-
gards the outer loop, it is not recommended to ad-
just the P band further down than 10°C and T.INT.
further down than 20 seconds. Higher values may
very well occur. T.DIFF. is usually always 0. The
neutral zone can be set for 0.4°C or higher if it is
not required that the suction pressure is kept as
narrow as possible around the set point. If the
neutral zone is too high, the regulator may fluctu-
ate too much.
As regards the inner loop it is recommended only
to use the default values for neutral zone (0.0), P
band (200%), T.INT. (30 seconds) and T.DIFF. (0
seconds)..The parameter MIN PULSE determines
the pulse duration up or down every time the sole-
noid valve is activated. If the value is high, a cor-
respondingly large capacity change is required
before the regulator reacts with an up or down sig-
nal. This is a kind of neutral zone. Default value is
0.5 seconds and should not be higher than 2 sec-
onds.
The parameter RUN TIME defines how long it will
take to run the slide from 0-100% at constant up
signal or from 100-0% at constant down signal.
Usually slide speed is always adjusted on the oil
needle valves positioned on the capacity regulat-
ing block so that the slide speed is approx 60 sec-
onds when the oil is warm from operation. This ad-
justment is usually carried out by the service engi-
neer who starts up the compressor unit.
82/222
If the slide speed for some reason cannot be ad-
justed for 60 seconds, the RUN TIME parameter
must be changed so that run time corresponds to
the actual operating conditions. If this is not done,
it will appear as if the PID regulator is out of con-
trol, ie it will increase capacity when it should de-
crease capacity as well as go far beyond its set-
point.
If it is necessary to set the RUN TIME value higher
than 60 seconds, YORK Refrigeration recom-
mends increasing the integral-time (T.INT) corre-
spondingly. Do not, however, use a T.INT. higher
than 120 seconds as this may prevent the capa-
city slide from reaching 100%. A T.INT increase
informs the system that slide function is slower
than expected.
Example 1
Screw compressor with a combination of slide
regulation and frequency regulation.
Slide velocity is 60 seconds from 0-100% slide
movement. This may be shown as 0-42% capacity
on the UNISAB II display. When the slide has
reached 100%, the frequency converter will start
to increase the frequency to the max frequency
set. This will take 60 seconds and be shown as
42-100% in the UNISAB II display. Thus the RUN
TIME parameter must be set for 60+60=120 sec-
onds for correct regulation.
When switching between manual and automatic
control, another difference between the PID regu-
lator and the previous regulator can be seen. A
suction pressure level which is much higher than
the set point will produce a very high output signal
from the regulator.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
If switching from manual to auto and back again
rather quickly, the regulator will have produced a
very large output signal when regulating in auto.
This signal may make the regulator unstable in
case the setting of the oil valves mentioned above
is incorrect. If the regulator becomes unstable,
keep control mode in manual until the regulator
has stabilized (without activating the capacity up
and down keys).
Example 2
Nz = 0.0
P band = 10.0
T. I NT. = 60.0
T. DI FF. = 0.0
In case the compressor is running very unsteadily
during regulation or two compressors cannot find
one another in parallel operation, raise the P band
to eg. 50°C.
0178_430_en.fm
If the running of the compressor has steadied, but
the regulator seems slow to reach its set point, re-
duce the P band a little at a time until the running
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
of the compressor becomes unsteady again. Now
raise the P band to the last applicable value. If the
suction pressure still does not reach its setpoint
(depending on the setting of Nz) a reduction in the
integral-time can be necessary to fine-tune the
regulator.
If the regulator during a long period of time seems
to hunt, increase the T. INT. to eg. 100-200 sec. If
the hunting stops, reduce the T. INT. until the sys-
tem starts hunting again. Now increase the T. INT.
to the last applicable value.
Usually it will never be necessary to change the T.
DIFF. to another value than 0 sec. However, in
special cases where the compressor is part of a
process plant, eg. in petrochemical plants, it may
be necessary to use another value than 0 sec.
This will only be necessary if the process requires
a very fast regulation upwards or downwards to
avoid that the suction pressure removes itself too
far from the set point.
83/222
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Input signal

0 5 10 15 Time

Output signal
P-part B
A: Proportional band=10°C A
B: Proportional band=5°C

0 5 10 15 Time

Output signal
I-part C
D
C: Integral time=30 sec
D: Integral time=60 sec

0 5 10 15 Time

84/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Output signal
D-part
F
E: Differential time=10 sec E
F: Differential time=20 sec

0 5 10 15 Time

Output signal
0178_430_en.fm

PID-part

0 5 10 15 Time

Reciprocating compressors If the P Band is above 0, the delay times can be

Reciprocating compressors are capacity regulat-
ed in stages by connection/disconnection of cylin-
ders, typically in pairs, through solenoid valves
controlled by UNISAB II.
How fast the compressor loads/unloads stages is
determined by the timers DELAY UP and DELAY
DOWN, which will start counting as soon as the
value is outside the neutral zone.
The regulator is allowed to have a P Band of 0,
which means that the stages are loaded in sec-
onds as set.
prolonged as long as the value is within the P
Band.
The P Band is only relevant if the P Band factors
DELAY UP and/or DELAY DOWN are set in the
picture P BAND FACTOR at a value above 1. See
section P BAND FACTOR.
If the value is just outside the neutral zone and the
P Band factor DELAY UP is eg 10, counting will be
slow: "1 sec." becomes 10 sec.
If the value is just outside the P Band, counting will
be speeded up, "1 sec" becomes 1 sec.

0178-445 - ENG 85/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory Unit

setting

Suct. pressure Sp 1 -1 +9 +1 BAR

(-90) (+ 24.8)1* (-19.4) °C/R717

Sp 2 -1 +9 +1 BAR
(-90) (+ 24.8)1* (-19.4) °C/R717

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 10 °C

Brine temperature Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 5 °C

Disch. side Sp 1 -1 + 24 +8 BAR

(-90) (+ 58)2* (+ 21.4) °C/R717

Sp 2 -1 + 24 +8 BAR
(-90) (+ 58)2* (+ 21.4) °C/R717

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 10 °C

Hot water Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 5 °C

Ext. cool Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -

Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -

Nz 0 + 999 0 -

Pb 0 + 999 0 -

Ext. heat Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -

Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -

Nz 0 + 999 0 -

Pb 0 + 999 0 -

86/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory Unit

setting

Motor current limiter Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp

Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp

NOTE: 1* HPO/HPC +25 bar (+60°/R717) 2* HPO/HPC +40 bar (+79.4°/R717)

0178_430_en.fm

0178-445 - ENG 87/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit

Capacity control Nz 0.0 10.0 0.0 %

Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Min Pulse 1.0 50.0 1.0 sec

Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec

Vi slide control, Nz 0.0 10.0 4.0 %

Compressors with
automatic Vi regu- Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %
lation
T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Min Pulse 1.0 10.0 1.0 sec

Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec

Suct. pressure Sp 1 -1 +9 +1 BAR

(-90) (+24.8) (-19.4) °C/R717

Sp 2 -1 +9 +1 BAR
(-90) (+24.8) (-19.4) °C/R717

Nz 0.0 200.0 0.0 °C/R717

Pb 0.1 999.9 10.0 °C/R717

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Brine temperature Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C

Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C

Nz 0.0 100 0 °C

Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0 sec

88/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit

Discharge Sp 1 -1 +24 +8 BAR

(90) (+58) (+21.4) °C/R717

Sp 2 -1 +24 +8 BAR
(90) (+58) (+21.4) °C/R717

Nz 0.0 200 0.0 °C/R717

Pb 0.1 999.9 10 °C/R717

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Hot water Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C

Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C

Nz 0.0 100 0 °C

Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

0178_430_en.fm

Ext. cool Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Universal
regulator Sp 2 -999 +999 0

Nz 0 999.9 0

Pb 0 999.9 100

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Ext. heat Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Universal
regulator Sp 2 -999 +999 0

Nz 0 999.9 0

Pb 0 999.9 100

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Motor current Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp

Limiter Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp

Note 1. Run Time factory settings are as follows:

0178-445 - ENG 89/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

SAB 330 S SAB 330 L SAB 330 E Others

Cap. Run Time 41 56 74 60

Vi Run Time 19 24 31 60

Table 9C - Settings - Regulating parameters, SAB 330

Regulator type Factory setting SAB 330
Hydraulic Mechanical
Capacity control Nz 0 2
Pb 200 200
T.Int. 30 30
T.Diff. 0 0
Min Pulse 1 2
Run time See note 1 See note 1
Vi slide control, Nz 4 10
Compressors with Pb 200 200
automatic Vi T.Int. 30 30
regulation T.Diff. 0 0
Min Pulse 1 1
Run time See note 1 See note 1

Set points on regulators
All regulators for capacity regulation (suction
pressure, brine temp, etc) can have two 2 set
points which are selected by opening/closing a
digital input named REGULATOR SET POINT 1
OR 2 (see wiring diagrams).
Note that also the Motor Current Limiter has two
set points, which are selected with another digital
input named MOTOR CURRENT SET POINT 1
OR 2.
CONTROL ON = SUCTION
The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure
transducer on the compressor suction side.
The regulator is set by selecting SUCTION I
SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re-
peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom
of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the
P Band can only be selected when the pressure is
shown in °C/R.
CONTROL ON = BRINE
The brine temperature is measured by a Pt 100
sensor on the spot where the temperature is to be
regulated. The sensor is not built into the com-
pressor.
The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE
TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the
picture.
CONTROL ON = DISCHARGE
The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure
transducer on the compressor discharge side.
The regulator is set by selecting DISCH. SIDE I
DISCH.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re-
peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom

90/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the
P Band can only be selected when the pressure is
shown in °C/R.
CONTROL ON = HOT WATER
The hot water temperature is measured by a Pt
100 sensor connected to the brine temperature in-
put (see wiring diagrams). Position the sensor on
the spot where the temperature is to be regulated.
The sensor is not built into the compressor.
The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE
TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the
picture.
Note that the BRINE REGULATOR at this stage
functions as a HOT WATER REGULATOR. The
difference is that the compressor will load capacity
at decreasing temperature.
0178_430_en.fm
Universal regulator (Ext. input)
Besides the above-mentioned regulators it is also
possible to use the universal regulator.
To do so, connect a 4-20 mA sensor (pressure,
temperature or other) to the UNISAB II input
named POSSIBLE REMOTE COMPRESSOR
OPERATION.
When selecting 4-20 mA input in the menu CALI-
BRATE, the following picture will appear:
4 mA 0 RAMETERS. Press to the bottom of the picture
20 mA 0 with K where the set values of the regulator are
NOT USED
The signal must be scaled to fit the sensor meas-
uring range.
Ex.: A temperature sensor of -30°C to +20°C is
used.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G and
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
-30 and press G .
Move the cursor down to 20 mA, press G and
the cursor moves right once more. Change the
value to +20 and press G .
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G
and the cursor moves to the right. Select EXTER-
NAL INPUT SIGNAL by means of J or K.
The picture will now look like this:
4 mA -30
20 mA 20
EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
Each measuring signal can be scaled in accord-
ance with the transducer measuring range.
In the menu CONFIG, select in line CONTROL
ON one of the following:
Ext. cool
If selecting this function, the compressor will reg-
ulate the capacity upwards in case of increasing
measuring value.
Ext. heat
If selecting this function, the compressor will reg-
ulate the capacity upwards in case of decreasing
measuring value.
Now select menu BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-
positioned. These can be set by pressing G fol-
lowed by J or K.
Set point control with current input
The set points of SUCTION PRESSURE, BRINE
TEMPERATURE, DISCH.PRESSURE, HOT WA-
TER and CAPACITY can all be changed through
a 4-20 mA signal.
91/222
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
Connect these to the terminals as shown in the
wiring diagrams.
Suction pressure
In the menu CONFIG SUCTION SIDE must be se-
lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following
picture will appear:
4 mA 0
20 mA 0
NOT USED
Ex.: The set point is to vary from -50 to -10°C/R
corresponding to a change of the current signal
from 4 - 20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
ue to -50 with K, then press G again.
Move the cursor to 20 mA, Press G until the cur-
sor moves to the left, and change the value -10,
press G again.
Move the cursor to third line, press G until the
cursor moves to the right, and select
SUCT.PRESSURE SETPOINT with J or K. Fin-
ish by pressing G .
The picture will now look like this:
4 mA -50
20 mA -10
SUCTION PRESS. SETPOINT
The set point of the suction pressure regulator is
to vary from -50 to -10°C/R corresponding to a
change in the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by select-
ing SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION PRESSURE I
PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTU-
AL SP with K.
92/222
Brine temperature
In the menu CONFIG BRINE must be selected in
the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA INPUT I
in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will
appear:
4 mA 0
20 mA 0
NOT USED
Ex.: The set point is to vary from -10 to +20°C cor-
responding to a change of the current signal from
4 - 20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
-10 with K, then press G again.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
+20, and press G.
Move the cursor down to CONTROL ON. Press
G until the cursor moves to the right, and select
BRINE TEMP SET POINT with J or K . Finish by
pressing G .
The picture will now look like this:
4 mA -10
20 mA 20
BRINE TEMP. SETPOINT
The set point of the brine regulator is now going to
change from -10 to +20°C corresponding to a
change of the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by select-
ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K.
Disch. pressure
In the menu CONFIG DISCH.SIDE must be se-
lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following
picture will appear: picture will appear:

4 mA 0 4 mA 0
20 mA 0 20 mA 0
NOT USED NOT USED

Ex.: The setpoint is to vary from +10 til +35°C/R
corresponding to a change of the current signal
from 4-20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
+10 with J, then press G again.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
+35, and press G.
Move the cursor down to third line. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and select DISCH.
0178_430_en.fm
Ex.: The set point is to vary from +30 to +65°C cor-
responding to a change in the current signal from
4-20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
ue to +30 with K, then press G again.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
+65, and press G.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G
until the cursor moves to the right, and select

PRESSURE SET POINT with J or K. Finish by HOTWATER SET POINT with J eller K. Finish
pressing G . by pressing G.
The picture will now look like this: The picture will now like this:

4 mA 10 4 mA +30
20 mA 35 20 mA +65
DISCH. PRESS. SETPOINT HOT WATER SETPOINT

The set point of the discharge pressure regulator
is now going to change from +10 to +35°C/R cor-
responding to a change of the current from 4-20
mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by select-
ing DISCH.SIDE I DISCH.PRESS I PARAME-
TERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with
K.
Hotwater
In the menu CONFIG, HOTWATER must be se-
lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
The setpoint in the hotwater regulator now chang-
es from +30 to +65°C, corresponding to a change
in the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the setpoint value by select-
ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K .
Capacity control
UNISAB II must be set in REMOTE mode in the
picture CONTROL.
In the menu CALIB, select 4-20 mA INPUT I, and
the following picture will appear:

0178-445 - ENG 93/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
4 mA 0 plies to version 1.08 and later versions). This
20 mA 0 means that for an SMC 108 without total unload-
NOT USED
Ex.: The set point of the capacity slide on a screw
compressor is to vary from 0 to 100% correspond-
ing to a change in the current signal from 4-20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
ue to 0 (skip this if the value is 0) with J or K, and
press G again.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-
ue to 100, and press G.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR. Press G
until the cursor moves to the right, and select CA-
PACITY SET POINT with J or K. Finish by press-
ing G.
The picture will now look like this:
4 mA 0
20 mA 100
CAPACITY SETPOINT
The capacity slide will now move from 0% to
100% corresponding to a change in the current
from 4 - 20 mA.
In the same way it is possible to control the capac-
ity on a reciprocating compressor.
The reciprocating compressor changes one ca-
pacity stage up or down depending on whether
the signal is above or below the percentage corre-
sponding to the capacity stage in question. The
timers DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN, which are
used during the loading/unloading of capacity
stages, are now active when capacity regulation
94/222
takes place with an external 4-20 mA signal (ap-
ing the following changes apply:
0% ≤ Signal < 25% = 0% capacity,
25% ≤ Signal < 50% = 25% capacity,
50% ≤ Signal < 75% = 50% capacity,
75% ≤ Signal < 100% = 75% capacity,
100% ≤ Signal = 100% capacity.
This works as follows:
Start
When the signal is above 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO
START = YES has been configured, the timer
START DELAY will begin to count down (in case
of screw compressors).
For reciprocating compressors, the timer START
DELAY will start once the signal is above the low-
est capacity stage. When the timer START DE-
LAY has counted down, the compressor will start
and follow the signal up/down. Note, however,
that various limiters may reduce the compressor
capacity.
Stop
When the signal is below 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO
STOP = YES has been configured, the timer
STOP DELAY will stop counting down (in case of
screw compressors). For reciprocating compres-
sors, the timer STOP DELAY will start once the
signal is below the lowest capacity stage. For re-
ciprocating compressors with total unloading, the
timer STOP DELAY will be activated when the sig-
nal is below 0%. When the STOP DELAY timer
has finished counting down, the compressor will
stop.
In case the current signal drops to -10% (2.4 mA),
there will be a change to the chosen form of regu-
lation (eg suction pressure regulation, brine regu-
lation, etc). If the signal exceeds -10% once more,
there will be a change to capacity remote control.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

When UNISAB II is configured to "capacity set
point", the starting number is changed to 0. The
"old" starting number is stored and reinserted in
case UNISAB II is configured differently from "ca-
pacity set point".
Climatic Control
This function can be used for both reciprocating
and screw compressors without automatic Vi reg-
ulation. The function is included in the menu CON-
FIG and is further described in section Configura-
tion.
The set point of the inlet temperature on the water
side of plants that are regulated on brine temper-
ature or hot water temperature can be dislocated
by the outside temperature. This requires a 4 - 20
mA temperature transducer, which is connected
to the current inlet in UNISAB II as shown in the
0178_430_en.fm
continuity and below the bottom point of disconti-
nuity.
The factor by which the outside temperature will
influence the inlet temperature positively or nega-
tively must be set in the BRINE, HOTWATER or
UNIVERSAL regulator. In the picture CONFIG,
select CONTROL ON = BRINE or HOTWATER,
or (UNIVERSAL regulator) EXT.COL/EXT. HEAT
as well as CLIMA CONTROL = YES in the menu
CONFIG.
Example 1:
On a water cooling unit, the inlet temperature is to
be corrected by the outside temperature.
1) If the outside temperature is +30 °C or more,
the inlet temperature should be +4°C.
2) If the outside temperature is+0°C or less,
the inlet temperature should be +12°C.

wiring diagrams positioned at the end of this man- In the menu CONFIG, set CONTROL ON on
ual. BRINE and CLIMA CONTROL on YES. Select an
Use a standard temperature transducer with a outside sensor with a range of 0 - +30 °C.
suitabe temperature range, eg -30 - +25°C as Fig. 5.3
shown in Fig. 5.2. Note that the points of disconti-
T inlet
nuity in the diagram will be determined by the
transducer measuring range as seen in the follow-
14
ing examples 1 and 2.
Fig. 5.2 12 Sp 1

T inlet
10

Sp 1 (+65 5
°C) 8

Sp 2 6
(+25 °C) T out
5 Sp 2 4

4 mA 20 mA
(+25 °C)
2
(30 °C)
T out
-10 10 20 30 40
No further compensation will be made once the
outside temperature is above the top point of dis-

0178-445 - ENG 95/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 12°C at To Example 2:

= 0°C and SP2 = 4°C at To = 30°C.
Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
highest outside temperature.
The straight line in Fig. 5.3 shows how the inlet
temperature is going to vary under the influence of
the outside temperature.
Select the menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PA-
RAMETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and
SET POINT 2 with K.
On a heat pump unit the inlet temperature is to be
corrected by the outside temperature.
1) If the outside temperature is +30°C, the inlet
temperature must be +40 °C.
2) If the outside temperature is-10°C, the inlet
temperature must be +65 °C.
In the menu CONFIG, adjust CONTROL ON to
HOTWATER and CLIMA CONTROL to YES.

Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 12°C from Select an outside sensor in the range -10 - +30 °C.
Fig. 5.3 by pressing G. Fig. 5.4
Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 4°C from T Inlet
Fig. 5.3 by pressing G.
At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and 80

PROP.BAND = 5°C as starting points. 70

SP1
60
The system is now adjusted to the desired func- 50
tion. SP2 40
30
The picture will now look like this:
20
10
T out
SET POINT 1 12 °C
-20 -10 10 20 30 40
SET POINT 2 0 °C
NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C
In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 65°C at To
PROP. BAND 5 °C
= -10°C and SP2 = 40°C at To = 30°C.
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
which the inlet temperature is regulated at that the highest outside temperature.
particular moment. If the outside temperature is The straight line indicates how the inlet tempera-
30°C, this value must be 4°C. ture is going to vary under the influence of the out-
If the outside temperature is 0°C, the value must side temperature.
be 12°C. Select menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAM-
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the ETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and SET
measuring range in the picture MOTOR: POINT 2.
Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 65°C from the
MOTOR CURR XXX A figure by pressing G.
EXT. INPUT XX Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 40°C from the
OUTSIDE TEMP. XX %
figure by pressing G.

96/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and Adjusting slide speed (screw
PROP.BAND = 5°C as starting points. compressors with hydraulic slides)
The system is now adjusted to the desired func-
tion. Capacity slide
The capacity slide is moved by adding or remov-
SET POINT 1 65 °C ing oil from the slide piston cylinder. The move-
SET POINT 2 40 °C ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates
NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving
PROP. BAND 5 °C the slide in the desired direction. If this movement
takes place too fast, the system will become very
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and
which the inlet temperature is regulated at that tear of the slide.
particular moment. If the outside temperature is
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves
30°C, this value must be 40°C.
have been built into the oil lines and by changing
If the outside temperature is -10°C, the value must the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide
be 65°C. movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the The slide speed is checked with the compressor in
measuring range in the picture CAPACITY:
0178_430_en.fm

MANUAL mode, at normal oil temperature and by

MOTOR CURR XXX A
EXT. INPUT XX
CLIMA COMP. XX %
Examples 1) and 2) precondition that the flow
temperature is measured with the normal Pt 100
input, but if a temperature transducer of 4-20 mA
is installed in a common reservoir, the outdoor
compensation will also be able to work here.
See section Universal regulator in which the pro-
cedure will be exactly the same as described in
above examples as this regulator can also be
used for both COOLING and HEATING functions.
In both examples the inlet temperature will rise at
falling outside temperatures.
If the opposite effect is required, ie rising inlet tem-
perature at rising outside temperature, SP1 and
SP2 must be switched.
activating E F used for capacity regulation.
With the slide in minimum position (< 5%) and with
a constant pressure on E (capacity up), it takes
about 60 sec for the slide to move to 100%, and
with a constant pressure on F (capacity down)
approx 60 sec to move down to 0%.
Is this not the case, adjust the throttle valves.
Volume ratio slide
The volume ratio slide is moved by adding or re-
moving oil for the slide piston cylinder. The move-
ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates
the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving
the slide in the desired direction. If this movement
takes place too fast, the system will become very
unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and
tear of the slide.
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves
have been built into the oil lines and by changing
the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide
movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.

0178-445 - ENG 97/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
The speed is checked with the compressor in
MANUAL mode and at a normal oil temperature.
Bring the capacity slide to 20-30% position.
Select picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION I SET
POINT 1.
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
and change the value to -10% by pressing G and
K. This will make the slide move to minimum po-
sition.
Return to VI POSITION to check the slide move-
ment.
When the slide has reached minimum, change
SET POINT 1 to 110%. The slide will now move to
maximum position. Check the speed of the move-
ment from 0% to 100% in the picture with VI PO-
SITION.
The movement from 0% to 100% must be adjust-
ed on the throttle valves to last approx 120 sec.
This also applies to the movement from 100% to
0%.
Use SET POINT 1 with either - 10% or 110% to
move the slide back and forth until the speed is
correct.
Variable Zero position
In general
The flow of screw compressors at low slide posi-
tions seen in relation to the fully loaded "flow", is
strongly dependent on the operating conditions.
Thus, it has turned out to be expedient to enter a
"floating zero point", which ensures that the com-
pressor operates with a correct slide position.
The program in UNISAB II ensures that the SAB
202 compressor always adapts to the variable op-
erating conditions.
98/222
Based on discharge pressure, suction pressure,
compressor type and capacity, UNISAB II calcu-
lates a "zero point" below which the compressor
capacity slide is not permittted to drop while the
compressor is operating.
When the compressor starts, the new "zero point"
will be calculated, and the capacity slide moves as
quickly as possible from a physical zero point (me-
chanical impact) to the calculated zero. As long as
the slide position is below the calculated zero
point, the capacity is shown as a negative value in
the display.
In case the calculated zero point cannot be set
within a certain time limit, which is dependent on
the calculated movement, an alarm will be issued.
When the compressor stops, the slide will drop to
the calculated zero point. The motor will stop, and
hereafter the slide will be pushed down to the
physical zero position by the built-in spring.
Once the differential pressure across the com-
pressor has been equalized (Π=1), the calculated
zero point and the physical zero position will be
the same.
If the pressure conditions are changed during op-
eration so that the calculated "zero point" of the
slide is moved (whereby the corrected capacity is
changed), the capacity may be a negative value
for a certain period.
For all other screw compressor types than SAB
202 a "zero point" can be set manually, if required.
This manually set zero point has the same func-
tion as described above in the sections for com-
pressor start and stop.
Corrected capacity
UNISAB II will automatically correct the capacity
reading in relation to both the new calculated zero
point and to the Vi slide position when automatic
Vi regulation is included.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

With manual Vi regulation the capacity reading is
automatically corrected in relation to the new cal-
culated zero point.
Fig. 5.5
Remember that whenever the Vi slide is moved
manually, the position transmitter of the capacity
slide must be recalibrated at 100%.
The corrected capacity is calculated according to
the following principle:

0% 100%
Corrected capacity
Pressure cond.
1.5 12 25 Volume cond.: 4.5 3 2

Cap. slide
Measured slide pos.
0% 100%

0% Zero% pos. 100% 0%

“Zero slide” “Vi slide”

The capacity slide signal from the position trans- Manual setting of new zero point (all
mitter is scaled in such a way that 0% is read types of screw compressors)
0178_430_en.fm

when the slide position corresponds to the calcu-
lated/set zero point, and 100% is read when the
capacity slide meets the Vi slide, regardless of
whether the setting is carried out automatically or
manually.
Automatic setting of new zero point
(SAB 202)
The zero point for the various types of SAB 202 is
calculated according to a programmed algorithm.
The current calculated value of the zero point is
displayed in picture:
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO CAPACITY
POS.
With manual Vi regulation the zero point is correct-
ed and set automatically, corresponding to an op-
timum setting of the Vi slide. Consequently, it is of
great importance that the setting of the Vi slide
is correct.
For all screw compressor types without automat-
ic zero point setting, it is possible to set a "zero
point" manually, below which the compressor ca-
pacity slide is not allowed to drop while the com-
pressor is operating.
For SAB 202S and SAB 202L, which have auto-
matic settings of the zero point, manual setting is
usually not allowed.
The manual setting of the zero point is carried out
in the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configu-
ration point:
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
The setting ranges between 0-40% of max capac-
ity slide travel (at Vi ratio = 2).
With manual Vi regulation the zero point is cor-
rected automatically by a factor that depends on
an optimum (calculated) setting of the Vi-slide.
Consequently, it is very important that the set-
ting of the Vi slide is correct.

0178-445 - ENG 99/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
The setting will be stored when the compressor
stops and/or UNISAB II is switched off.
Built-in spacer block
If the compressor has a built-in spacer block and
Vi regulation is automatic, the MECHANICAL
ZERO must be set on YES. Thus, the travel of the
capacity slide will be reduced by the % value
[0-40%] which is entered in MANUAL ZERO so
that the corrected capacity may be calculated and
shown correctly.
The value [0-40%] that must be entered in MAN-
UAL ZERO must have the following size:
Fig. 5.6
length of spacer block
manual zero = 100%
length of total capacity travel
Setting of MECHANICAL ZERO is carried out in
the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configura-
tion point:
MECHANICAL ZERO [NO/YES]
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
The position transmitter is calibrated with the
spacer block mounted and the Vi-slide in minimum
(0%).
The alarm
In case the slide cannot reach the position corre-
sponding to a calculated or set zero point (ie a
positive read capacity) before the expiry of the
timer Tcap.neg., the compressor will be stopped with
the following alarm:
CAPACITY ERROR
Each second the timer Tcap.neg. is counting down by
a factor somewhere between 1 and 180 depend-
ing upon the read negative capacity. Each time
the slide moves above 0% read capacity, the timer
100/222
will be stopped. The timer is reset (set to the reset
value) and is restarted once the slide moves be-
low -2% capacity.
The timer is set in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
I TIMER RESET in the timer
CAP.NEG.
The reset value can be set in the interval of
60-20000. The factory value is 10000.
It is very important that the timer has been set cor-
rectly. Too low a value will result in the alarm Ca-
pacity error. Too high a value will make the com-
pressor run for too long a period with a negative
capacity.
Configuration
To obtain a correct calculation of the zero point, it
is important that the compressor type and swept
volume have been entered correctly.
The swept volume of the compressor is deter-
mined on the basis of:
Compressor type
RPM (50/60 Hz)
Male/female rotor
In case of SAB 202, UNISAB II will automatically
enter a swept volume value corresponding to the
S type with Male rotor and a 2-pole 50 Hz motor,
ie 1229 m3/h. The correct swept volume must be
based on the number of revolutions of the com-
pressor, ie 50/60 Hz supply, and on whether the
compressor has male or female rotor drive:
SAB 202 SM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1229 m3/h
SAB 202 SM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1475 m3/h
SAB 202 SF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1843 m3/h
SAB 202 SF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2212 m3/h
SAB 202 LM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1590 m3/h
SAB 202 LM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1908 m3/h
SAB 202 LF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 2385 m3/h
SAB 202 LF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2862 m3/h
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
The nominal swept volume at 50 Hz can be read
on the compressor name plate.
As mentioned earlier, two new configuration
points have been introduced in the picture SETUP
I CONFIG.:
MECHANICAL ZERO NO [/YES]
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
Only if the compressor has a built-in spacer block
as well as automatic Vi regulation, the MECAN-
ICAL ZERO must be set on YES. In all other cas-
es MECHANICAL ZERO is set on NO. See sec-
tion Built-in Spacer Block.
CALCULATED ZERO 22.0%
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
CAP. POSITION 66.5%
CAPACITY 100.0%
0178_430_en.fm
Electrical slide control
(Screw compressors SAB 250 and SAB 330)
These screw compressors are fitted with a capac-
ity slide (master slide) driven by an AC motor
through magnetic transmission, gearbox and
spindle, as well as a hydraulical Vi slide (baby
slide) which is controlled by a solenoid valve. The
digital output for the valve is always controlled au-
tomatically by UNISAB II. Only the capacity slide
is fitted with a position transmitter.
Note that the minimum pulse when moving the ca-
pacity slide is 1 second. For a SAB 330L this cor-
responds to a minimum capacity position change
of 1.8%. It is very useful to have this in mind when
adjusting the PID regulators. Further, there is a
pause of at least 1 second when changing the ro-
tation direction of the motor.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Manual setting of the zero point is carried out by
entering a zero point between 0-40% of max ca-
pacity slide travel in MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
See section Manual setting of new zero point.
Zero pos. picture
Reading of the current calculated zero point value
as well as any manual set zero point value takes
place in the diagnosis picture:
SET UP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO
CAPACITY POS.
(current reading 0-40%)
(manual adjustment 0-40%)
(current slide position corresponds to 4-20 mA
(corrected capacity - as read)
Part load and full load
As regards capacity control and Vi adjustment,
there are two operating modes: Part load and full
load.
At full load, the capacity is by definition 100%. By
activating the solenoid valve, the Vi slide is forced
in mesh with the capacity slide. The Vi is then ad-
justed by changing the capacity slide position,
which consequently moves the Vi slide. Note that
in the survey pictures, full load is indicated in the
fourth line by a solenoid valve symbol:
At part load, the Vi slide is reset to minimum po-
sition by deactivating the solenoid valve. The ca-
pacity slide is moved according to the capacity re-
quirement.
UNISAB II changes from part load to full load
mode when the capacity exceeds the selected
limit, VI MODE included in the picture SETUP I
101/222
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
CONFIG I COMPRESSOR. The default limit is
VI MODE = 97%, but it can be adjusted in the
range 70 to 97%.
UNISAB II returns to part load when the capacity
requirement decreases.
The changes described are performed automati-
cally in any of the modes MANUAL, AUTO and
REMOTE.
Calculated Vi position
When changing to or running in full load mode,
UNISAB II determines an optimal calculated Vi
position xVi [%] according to suction pressure/dis-
charge pressure ratio, compressor type, refriger-
ant and whether there is an economizer. Further-
more, the corresponding capacity slide position is
calculated:
xcap [%] xVi =100 [%] -xVi [%] *
(Vi-slide [mm] /Cap-slide [mm])
While in full load mode, the xcap[%] xVi is the set
point of the capacity slide position regulator.
Change to full load
When changing from part load to full load,
UNISAB II will run through the following steps:
1. Move capacity slide if necessary (see be-
low).
2. Activate solenoid valve of Vi slide to force Vi
slide into mesh with capacity slide.
3. Move capacity slide (and thus Vi slide) to op-
timal position xcap [%] xVi.
As regards point 1, UNISAB II compares the
above defined xcap [%] xVi with the actual capacity
slide position. If the actual position is much higher
than xcap [%] xVi , the result would be an undesirable
power consumption if the Vi slide valve is activat-
ed immediately. Therefore, the capacity slide is
102/222
moved as quickly as possible down into the area
where UNISAB II calculates that the power con-
sumption will be reasonable. After this, UNISAB II
will move on to points 2 and 3.
Change to part load
When changing from full load to part load,
UNISAB II will run through the following steps:
1. If necessary, move capacity slide (and thus
Vi slide) as close as possible to the limit VI
MODE to avoid undesirable capacity jumps.
However, stop movement if/when reaching
the limit for reasonable power consumption.
2. Deactivate solenoid valve of Vi slide to re-
lease Vi slide and move it to minimum posi-
tion.
3. If still necessary, move capacity slide to the
limit VI MODE.
4. Change to normal capacity control.
Position indications
In the picture MOTOR, CAPACITY and VI POSI-
TION are indicated.
At full load, CAPACITY indication will show 100%,
while VI POSITION is calculated from the actual
capacity slide position.
At part load, CAPACITY indication will show the
actual capacity slide position, while VI POSITION
is 0%.
Slide brake control
The slide brake is released for a short time -
BRAKE DLY - before the slide motor is activated.
The brake is also released for the period of time
BRAKE DLY after deactivating the slide motor.
Brake DLY can be selected in the range 0 to 0.5
seconds in the picture DIAGNOSES I MISC.
FUNCTIONS.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

Capacity alarm a move is expected, the timer will count down. If

If the slide does not move as expected, a capacity
alarm will be issued. This means that each time
the slide moves at least 0.5% in the chosen direc-
tion, a CAPACITY timer is reset to 100 seconds. If
0178_430_en.fm
the timer reaches 0, the alarm will be issued. The
timer can be inspected in the picture DIAG-
NOSES I MISC. FUNCTIONS.

0178-445 - ENG 103/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation

104/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions
6. Limiting functions
UNISAB II includes a number of limiting functions
(in the following called limiters).
The purpose of a limiter is to prevent shutdowns
by limiting or even changing the compressor ca-
pacity when the measured value exceeds the se-
lected limits. In most cases, "changing the capac-
ity" means decreasing it. However, this is not the
case with all limiters.
In general, a limiter can be watching, passive or
active. While all limiters are watching, the com-
pressor start/stop and the capacity regulation will
work normally.
While a limiter is passive or active, the compres-
sor cannot be started. If the compressor is in op-
eration, the capacity regulation will be partly disa-
bled. Further, if a limiter is active, the capacity will
0178_431_en.fm
be changed actively.
All relevant limiters are permanently in operation.
If necessary, they will intervene in any of the oper-
ating modes MANUAL, AUTO and REMOTE.
In case the compressor is in MANUAL mode and
a limiter is active, the capacity slide will automat-
ically be returned to its original value as soon as
the limiter is watching.
When a limiter is passive or active, the red lamp
will flash slowly, and the warning relay will be ac-
tivated. Further, the display will show whether the
limiter is passive or active.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
There is a standard limiter for each of the follow-
ing:
• Low suction pressure
• High discharge pressure
• High motor current
• Low brine temperature
• High water temperature
• High differential pressure
Pdiff =Pdisch - Psuct (HPO and
HPC reciprocating compressors)
Furthermore, the following special limiters exist:
• High suction pressure
• Suction ramp
• High discharge temperature
Standard limiters
The standard limiting function is based on the user
selected high/low alarm limit, high/low warning
limit and the limiting zone Lz. In the special case
of the high motor current limiter, the value of Lz is
2% for screw compressors and 5% for reciprocat-
ing compressors. In all other cases, Lz is calculat-
ed as half the difference between the alarm limit
and the warning limit.
Fig. 6.1illustrates how a standard limiter works
with the high discharge pressure limiter as exam-
ple.
105/222
UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions

Fig. 6.1
SCREW COMPRESSORS (ALL LIMITERS) and RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
RECIPR. COMPRESSORS (MOTOR CURRENT (ALL LIMITERS EXCEPT MOTOR CURRENT
LIMITER) LIMITER)

ALARM

WARNING
Limiting zone

Time Time

1 Limiter is watching. Normal control, capacity can increase or decrease. If compressor is not in operation, it can be started.
2 Limiter changes from watching to passive.

Limiter is passive. Capacity cannot be increased. Capacity is not reduced by Limiter,

3 but possibly by egulator. If compressor is not running, it cannot be started.

4 Limiter becomes active. Capacity is reduced at once, and timer begins to count.

5 Limiter is active. At each timeout, capacity is reduced and timer restarted, until compressor stops at low capacity. If compres-
sor is not running, it cannot be started.

6 Limiter changes from active to passive.

7 Limiter changes from passive to watching.

8 Compressor is stopped (shutdown) immediately.

In the example, the alarm (= shutdown) limit for
high discharge pressure has been set for 16 bar,
while the warning limit is 14 bar. As indicated, the
size of the limiting zone (Lz) is then (16 -14) / 2 =
1 bar. The limit of the limiting zone is thus warning
limit - Lz = 14 -1 = 13 bar.
As shown in Fig. 6.1, most reciprocating compres-
sor limiters differ from the corresponding limiters
for screw compressor in the way that when the
measured value is within the limiting zone, the sta-
tus of the limiter will depend on whether the limiter
has been watching or active. If the limiter has
been watching, it will remain watching in the limit-
ing zone. If the limiter has been active, it will be-
come passive for as long as it is in the limiting
zone.
Motor current limiter
Even the high motor current limiter is special for
reciprocating compressors. When one stage is
disengaged due to the limiter, the resulting motor
current drop will be measured. It is assumed that
if the stage is re-engaged, the motor current will
increase by the size of the drop. To avoid disen-
gaging and re-engaging in turn, the limiter will en-
sure that the stage will not be re-engaged until the
resulting current will be below 95% of the limit for
the limiter zone.
Note that the warning limit for motor current is
SET POINT 1 selected in the picture MOTOR I
MOTOR POWER. If SETPOINT 1 = 1000 kW,
the limit for the limiting zone will be 1000 - 2%
= 980 kW for screw compressors, and 1000 -
5% = 950 kW for reciprocating compressors.

106/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions
High difference pressure limiter
Note in particular that this limiter only applies to
HPO and HPC compressors and that it has a fixed
warning limit of 25.2 bar and a fixed alarm limit of
26 bar. The limiter is released at 25 bar and it is
passive between 25-25.2 bar.
Special limiters
High suction pressure limitation
It is possible to have a high suction pressure lim-
iting function. The effect of this high suction pres-
sure limiting function is that the compressor ca-
pacity is limited to an adjustable max value when-
ever the suction pressure is above the suction
pressure warning limit.
Max capacity at "high suction pressure limitation"
is set in picture:
SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAP. LIMIT as: LIMIT
0178_431_en.fm
HIGH xxx.x%.
High limit can be set between 0% and 100%
where a setting of 100% disables the function.
In the WARNING picture the text "SUCT. PRESS
HIGH LIM" will appear.
Suction ramp
With the timer SUCTION RAMP it is possible to in-
dicate the speed at which the compressor is al-
lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-
tion, which is used for as long as the compressor
is working down towards its normal operating
point, is a combination of low suction pressure lim-
iting function and a ramp function.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function pre-
vents the compressor from increasing its capacity
above 5%, the timer STOP DELAY will not be ac-
tivated and the compressor will continue operat-
ing.
The suction pressure limitation without the ramp
function can stop the compressor if capacity
comes below 5% for a longer period.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
High discharge pipe temperature (one-stage re-
ciprocating compressors)
From version 1.10 and onwards a capacity limiting
function has been entered for all one-stage recip-
rocating compressors using refrigerant R717.
This function is activated at certain operating con-
ditions, especially at excessive differential pres-
sure, corresponding to the operating diagram
zone 2 (zone 4, however, for CMO, SMC 100 S/L
and SMC 180).
At such operating conditions compressors of the
CMO/HPO and SMC/HPC type must as minimum
load 50% of their capacity when starting up and
during operation.
At present the limit curve (which is a straight line)
is fixed on the basis of a max permissible dis-
charge pipe/oil temperature(T2max) of 150°C as
well as suction superheating of 10°C.
Whenever the limiting function is active, the fol-
lowing will occur at start-up:
– Capacity stages corresponding to a min-
imum of 50% will be loaded.
When the limiting function is active during opera-
tion, with 50% capacity or more, the following will
occur:
– It is impossible, both in MANUAL, AUTO
or REMOTE, to unload capacity stages
so that the capacity drops below 50%, ie
50/66% are the lowest capacity stages -
also when "total unloading" has been se-
lected.
– In AUTO and REMOTE the timer STOP
DELAY will be started at 50/66% if the
regulator sends out a down regulating
signal. If one of the limiting functions is
to unload capacity, the timer DELAY
DOWN will be started at 50/66%.
107/222
UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions
If the compressor is operating at a capacity below
50% when the limiting function is active, the limit-
ing function will not actively begin to load stages.
However, the following will take place:
– In MANUAL the compressor will be
stopped on the "total unloading timer"
provided that the capacity stays below
50% for more than approx 4 mins.
– In AUTO and REMOTE the compressor
will be stopped on the "total unloading
timer" provided the regulator is neutral
and capacity remains below 50% for
more than approx 4 mins.
– If the regulator sends out a regulating
down signal, the timer STOP DELAY will
be started.
– If one of the other limiting functions is to
unload capacity, the timer DELAY
DOWN will stop at 50/66%.
– If the regulator sends out a regulating up
signal and the compressor is loading
stages so that capacity rises to 50% or
more, the situation will be the same as
the one described in the previous sec-
tion.
108/222
In the WARNING picture the text LIMITING DIS-
CHARGE TEMP. will appear if the compressor is
to be stopped on the "total unloading timer" due to
insufficient capacity or if the limiting function pre-
vents the capacity from being reduced in MANU-
AL, AUTO or REMOTE.
The limit curve (limiting zones 2/4) corresponds as
standard to suction superheating of 10°C (factory
value).
Since the limit curve is directly dependent on the
suction superheating of the plant, the actual su-
perheating of the plant must be entered as set
point 2 in picture: SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION
SUPERHEAT. I SETPOINT 2 if it differs from the
above factory value.
Adjusting range: -10 - +30°C
By adjusting SET POINT 2 parameter for suction
superheating upwards or downwards, the limit
curve will be dislocated accordingly.
If SET POINT 2 is set for -10°C, the limit curve will
be dislocated so much upward - 20°C compared
to normal - that the limiting fuction will be discon-
nected.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions

Display indications
The following tables show the texts appearing in
the display in connection with the various limiters.

Screw compressors Overview picture indication

Compressor Compressor WARNING picture, WARNING picture,

Limiter stopped running Passive indication Active indication

Standard Limiters:

Low suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM

High discharge pressure READY DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING DISCH. PRESS DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM

High motor current Irrelevant RUNN. OVERLOAD None None

Low brine temperature READY SUCTION LIM. LIMITING BRINE TEMP and BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and
LIMITING SUCT. PRESS LIMITING BRINE TEMP

High water temperature READY DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING HOT WATER and BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and
LIMITING DISCH. PRESS LIMITING HOT WATER

High differential pressure Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant

Special Limiters:

High suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. 1) None2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)
0178_431_en.fm

Suction ramp Irrelevant SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS Irrelevant

High discharge temp. Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant

Recipr. compressor Overview picturei ndication

Compressor stopped or running WARNING picture, WARNING picture,

Limiter Passive indication Active indication

Standard Limiters:

Low suction pressure SUCTION LIM. None SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM

High discharge pressure DISCHARGE LIM. None DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM

High motor current RUNN. OVERLOAD None None

Low brine temperature SUCTION LIM. LIMITING BRINE TEMP BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and
LIMITING BRINE TEMP

High water temperature DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING HOT WATER BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and
LIMITING HOT WATER

High differential pressure DISCHARGE LIM. None HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRES-

SURE

Special Limiters:

High suction pressure SUCTION LIM. 1) None2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)

Suction ramp SUCTION LIM. None None

High discharge temperature None None LIMITING DISCH. TEMP

0178-445 - ENG 109/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions

Notes: pressure comes below the warning limit less

1. Only shown while capacity is limited. 2°C/R.

2. If limiter is active (at suction pressure > 3. Limiter is not active or passive like standard
warning limit), it will remain active until the limiters. It actively limits capacity so that it is
less than or equal to the selected LIMIT
HIGH.

110/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance
7. Compressor control and surveillance
The various types of reciprocating and screw
compressors start in differents ways. Some types
have prelubrication whereas others start directly.
Under all circumstances certain alarms are sup-
pressed at this stage as described in sections
Alarms and warnings and Timers.
SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil
pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump
The pump is used for prelubrication and for main-
taining of a minimum oil pressure level during op-
eration. The pump is started and stopped in ac-
cordance with the compressor differential pres-
sure during operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
0178_432_en.fm
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 appear.
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
Normal setting for SAB 202:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4 Bar
Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
until the cursor moves to the right in the picture.
With K and J set the value. When the value has
been set, press G once more.
In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
ly.
When the compressor differential pressure has
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
pump will stop.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Starting sequence
When the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the oil full flow pump will start. Make sure
that the capacity slide is in minimum position. On
SAB 202 this is generally always the case as the
slide is pushed down by a spring.
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication
system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will start.
When the time has expired the compressor is
started and the pump will now run for min 60 sec.
The pump will stop when the differential pressure
is above SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressature 45 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
Low superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump
The compressors SAB 128 and SAB 163 HR are
frequency regulated screw compressors, ie the
capacity slide is fixed in maximum position and
cannot be moved.
The electric oil pump is used for prelubrication and
for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during
operation.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
111/222
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance
Normal setting for SAB 128/163 HR:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 =4.0 Bar
Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-
ous section.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received permission to
start, the oil pump will start and oil will be pumped
into the compressor lubrication system.
The oil flow switch must be activated within 600
seconds to avoid disconnection.
When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15
seconds and the electric fan will start. The fre-
quency converter will receive a signal to start.
The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 sec-
onds.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
See also section Timers.
Low oil pressure 45 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
Low superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil
pump
The pump is used for prelubrication and for main-
taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper-
ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-
112/222
ance with the compressor differential pressure
during operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
Normal setting for SAB 250/330:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
until the cursor moves to the right of the picture.
With K and J set the value. When the value has
been set, press G once more.
In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
ly.
When the compressor differential pressure has
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
pump will stop.
Starting sequence
When SAB 250/330 compressor stops, UNISAB II
will attempt to move the capacity slide below 5%
capacity. If this does not succeed, a CAPACITY
ERROR alarm will be issued and the compressor
will not start.
When the compressor has recieved starting per-
mission, the oil full flow pump will start.
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication
system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will start.
When the time has expired, the compressor will
start and the pump will now run for min 60 sec.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

The pump will stop when the differential pressure GSV/RWF with oil pump
is above SET POINT 2 as described above. The pump is used for prelubrication and for main-
Alarm surveillance taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper-
During start the following alarms are delayed: ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-
ance with the compressor differential pressure
during operation.
Low oil pressure 45 sec
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
Low superheat 300 sec POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
High superheat 300 sec SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump
is to start whereas SET POINT 2 is the pressure
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, set
The delayed alarms are described in section Tim- SET POINT 1 for the lowest pressure level.
ers. Normal setting for GSV/RWF:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 bar.
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil SET POINT 2 = 4.0 bar.
pump Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
0178_432_en.fm

Starting sequence
When the compressor has received starting per-
mission, it must be checked if the capacity slide is
in minimum position. Before starting the compres-
sor, the oil level switch in the oil separator must be
activated.
Start the compressor.
After a delay of 60 seconds from compressor
start, no signal from the level switch for more than
10 seconds will result in disconnection.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
until the cursor has moved to the right side of the
picture. Set the value by means of K and J .
When the value has been set, press G once
more.
SET POINT 2 is set in the same way.
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-
ly.
When the compressor differential pressure has
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 seconds,
the pump will stop.

Low oil pressure 45 sec Starting sequence

High filter diff. pressure
Low superheat
High superheat
Low/high oil temperature
See also section Timers
When the compressor has received starting per-
300 sec
mission, check whether the capacity slide is still in
300 sec minimum position. In case of compressor stop,
300 sec make sure that the capacity slide and the volume
slide (if fitted with automatic Vi) are in minimum
300 sec
position.

0178-445 - ENG 113/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

Before start-up the oil level switch in the oil sepa-
rator must be active. If this is not the case, an
alarm for oil system error will be issued.
No signal from the oil level switch will result in dis-
connection after a delay of 60 seconds from com-
pressor start or during operation.
If the oil level switch is active, the prelubrication
period will begin and the oil will be pumped into
the compressor lubrication system. When the time
period has expired, the compressor will start and
the pump will run for min 60 seconds. The pump
will stop if the differential pressure is higher than
SET POINT 1.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressure 45 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
Low superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
Normal setting for SV24/26:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-
ous section.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received starting per-
mission, check that the capacity slide is in mini-
mum position. The oil pump is started and oil will
now be pumped into the compressor lubrication
system. To avoid disconnection, the oil flow switch
must be activated within 45 seconds.
When the oil flow switch is activated, the compres-
sor will start.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressure 45 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec

Low superheat 300 sec

The delayed alarms are described in section Tim-
ers. High superheat 300 sec

Low/high oil temperature 300 sec

SV 24/26 with oil pump
The compressors SV 24 and SV 26 are small slide
regulated screw compressors.
The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
and maintenance of a minimum oil pressure dur-
ing operation.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
FV 24/26 with oil pump
The compressors FV 24 and FV 26 are small fre-
quency regulated screw compressors, ie the
mounted slide is only used during start and stop.
The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
during operation.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
operation.

114/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
Normal setting for FV 24/26:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-
ous section.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received permission to
start, the oil pump will start and oil is pumped into
the compressor lubrication system.
The oil flow switch must be activated within 45
seconds to avoid disconnection.
FV 19 with oil pump
The compressor FV 19 is a small frequency regu-
lated screw compressor without the stage regulat-
ed capacity control as featured in the SV 19.
The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
during operation.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
operation.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL
PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
Normal setting for FV 19:

When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15 SET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar
seconds and the electrical fan will start. The fre-
0178_432_en.fm

Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-

quency converter will then receive a signal to
start.
The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 sec-
onds.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
onds and will stop if the differential pressure is
higher than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressure 45 sec
ous chapter.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the oil pump will start and oil will be
pumped into the compressor lubrication system.
The oil flow switch must be activated within 45
seconds to avoid disconnection.
When the oil flow switch is activated, an oil
by-pass solenoid valve for unloading will open for
15 seconds and the electrical fan will start.

High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Starting signal is transmitted to the frequency con-
verter.
Low superheat 300 sec
The speed is increased to 1200 rpm in 10 sec-
High superheat 300 sec
onds.
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-
See also section Timers onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
than SET POINT 2 as described above.

0178-445 - ENG 115/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

Alarm surveillance The pump will run for 60 sec and stop.
During start the following alarms are delayed: Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure 45 sec During start the following alarms are delayed:
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec Low oil pressure 45 sec
Low superheat 300 sec High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec Low superheat 300 sec
High/low oil temperature 300 sec High superheat 300 sec

Low/high oil temperature 300 sec

See also section Timers.
See also section Timers.
VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
Once the compressor has received starting per- without oil pump
mission, the oil pump will start. Check that the ca-
Once the compressor has received starting per-
pacity slide is in minimum position.
mission, make sure that the capacity slide is in
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication minimum position.
system. As soon as the oil flow switch has been
Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the
activated, the prelubrication period will start.
oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.
When the time period has expired, the compres-
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10
sor will start and the pump will run for 60 sec.
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
Alarm surveillance
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressure 45 sec
Low oil pressure 45 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
Low superheat 300 sec
Low superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec
High superheat 300 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec

See also section Timers.

See also section Timers.

VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump
Once the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the pump will start. Make sure that the
capacity slide is in minimum position.
The compressor will start working.
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil
pump
Once the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-
sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi-
tion.

116/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the Low superheat 300 sec
oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.
High superheat 300 sec
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
The oil pump runs continually during operation to See also section Timers.
ensure sufficient pressure to move the capacity
slide. Reciprocating compressors
Alarm surveillance No particular starting up sequence exists for recip-
During start the following alarms are delayed: rocating compressors. However, some alarms are
delayed at this stage.
Low oil pressure 45 sec
Alarm surveillance
High filter diff. pressure 300 sec
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low superheat 300 sec
Low oil pressure 60 sec
High superheat 300 sec
High oil pressure 20 sec
Low/high oil temperature 300 sec
Low suct.gas superheat 15 sec
See also section Timers. High suct.gas superheat 300 sec
0178_432_en.fm

Low/high oil temperature 300 sec

SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump
Once the compressor has received starting per-
mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-
sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi-
tion.
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication
system and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will begin.
When this period has expired, the compressor will
start, and the pump will work for 300 sec and then
stop.
In case of a booster compressor, the pump will
run continually during operation to ensure suffi-
cient pressure to move the capacity slide.
See also section Timers.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressure 300 sec
Low disch. gas superheat 300 sec
Low/high intermediate discharge 300 sec
temperature
See also section Timers.
The following descriptions of the various functions
must be compared with the wiring diagrams in
which the activating connections are included.
External starting permission -
immediate stop
The input must be connected in order for the com-
pressor to run in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE. If
this input is opened during operation, the com-
pressor will stop immediately.
When the input is open, STOPPED will appear in
the bottom line of the display.

High filter diff. pressure 300 sec

0178-445 - ENG 117/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance
External starting permission -
normal stop
This input and IMMEDIATE STOP must be con-
nected before the compressor is going to start in
AUTO or REMOTE. If the input has not been con-
nected, the display will read STOPPED in the bot-
tom line.
If the input is opened during operation, the com-
pressor capacity will move to its minimum posi-
tion, and the compressor will stop on its delay be-
fore the actual time to stop.
In case the input CAPACITY DOWN BLOCKED is
connected, the compressor will not reduce capac-
ity once the input EXTERNAL STARTING PER-
MISSION NORMAL STOP is opened.
Oil charging, manual (screw
compressors)
Oil charging cannot take place with UNISAB II in
"STOPPED". If the compressor is fitted with an oil
pump for oil charging, it can be started in the fol-
lowing way:
Select menu TIMERS I OIL CHARGING and the
following picture will appear:
START OIL PUMP NO
TIMER 0 sec
Place the cursor on TIMER and press G until the
cursor moves to the right. Set the number of sec-
onds the pump is to run. Press G and move the
cursor back to START OIL PUMP. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, then select YES with
J or K .
The pump will now start and run for the time set.
For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3 compres-
sors a warning "Watch the oil pressure" will be is-
118/222
sued while the oil pump is in manual operation for
oil charging.
If the pump is to stop before time expiry, select NO
under START OIL PUMP.
Note: As from 2001 SAB 128/163 Mk3 and SAB
202 are no longer as standard fitted with a valve
for external connection to the oil pump suction
side. Thus it is not possible to charge oil with the
unit oil pump.
Motor current measuring
UNISAB II can be supplied with a signal 0-1 Amp
AC directly from a current transformer in the com-
pressor motor starter.
The value for the voltage ratio of the current trans-
former must be entered in the menu CONFIG I
RANGE M. CURR to get a correct reading of the
current.
Next, select menu MOTOR I MOTOR CUR-
RENT and the following picture will appear:
ACTUAL SP XX A
SET POINT 1 XX A
SET POINT 2 XX A
In SET POINT 1 enter the motor full load current
of the motor as read on the name plate. In SET
POINT 2 a lower value may be entered if the ab-
sorbed current is to be limited in certain periods.
Set points are set by placing the cursor on SET
POINT 1 or SET POINT 2 respectively. Press G
until the cursor moves to the right. The correct
number can now be set by using J or K .
It is possible to change between two set points by
opening or closing a digital input. See wiring dia-
grams.
Open input = SET POINT 1.
See also Current limiters.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

Motor power measuring The measuring of these values are set in the pic-
UNISAB II can be supplied with a 4-20 mA signal ture CONFIG I COP.
from a power transmitter of 0-xxxx KW.
Enter the power ratio of the power transmitter in COP ACTIVE NO
FLOW FACTOR 0.20 l/pls
the menu CONFIG I RANGE M. CURR to get a
LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0
correct reading of the power output.
In the menu CALIB I CALIBRATE COP, select The COP function is connected and disconnected
MOTOR SIGNAL for kW. in the menu SETTING I CONFIG I COP AC-
Then select the menu MOTOR I MOTOR POW- TIVE, cf section Configuration.
ER, and the following picture will appear: The calculated COP values are shown in the pic-
ture SETTING I DIAGNOSIS I COP.

ACTUAL SP xxxx KW A more comprehensive description of the COP

SET POINT 1 xxxx KW funtion and its setting is included in the manual
SET POINT 2 xxxx KW UNISAB II-COP.

In SET POINT 1 enter the motor top load power

read on the name plate. In SET POINT 2 a lower
Thermistor connection
If the motor is fitted with thermistors for protection
0178_432_en.fm

value can be entered for periods when less power

is required. of the motor temperature, these can be connected
directly to a digital input. See wiring diagrams.
Switch between the two set points by opening or
closing a digital input, cf wiring diagrams. Should the motor temperature rise excessively,
the compressor will stop.
Open input = SET POINT 1.
See also Current limiter
Aux. output
In the menu CALIB I AUX. OUTPUT the follow-
COP set-up
ing picture will appear:
UNISAB II can be set for measuring compressor
COP (Coefficient Of Performance), mechanical
AUX. OUTPUT
efficiency as well as Carnot efficiency.
ACTIVATED WHEN
Together with suction and discharge pressure and NOT USED
temperature, the following values form basis of
the calculations: The cursor is on AUX. OUTPUT. Press G and
the cursor moves to NOT USED.
• Temperature of chilled liquid before evapo-
rator. With J or K choose between:

• Volume flow of cooling gas on pressure side • READY

(m3/h). • AT MIN CAP.
• Motor power consumption in kW. • AT MAX CAP.
• Motor efficiency. • RUNNING

0178-445 - ENG 119/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance
• READY-EXT.
This function is connected to a digital output. See
wiring diagrams.
1) READY: If selecting this function, the output
will be activated when the compressor is
ready for operation in REMOTE. This
means that AUTO START has been config-
ured (and AUTO STOP), EXTERNAL
START NORMAL STOP has been set.
There are no alarms - and the compressor
can start.
2) AT MIN CAP: If selecting this function, the
output will be activated when the compres-
sor is below LOW LIMIT, which is set in the
menu CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis
is 1%.
3) AT MAX CAP: Select this function and the
output is activated when the compressor is
above HIGH LIMIT, which is set in the menu
CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis is 1%.
Please note that the line CAP.LIMITER is not in-
cluded in the CALIBRATION menu until the auxil-
iary output has been selected as either AT MIN.
CAP. or AT MAX. CAP.
4) RUNNING: If selecting this function, the out-
put will be activated whenever the compres-
sor is operating, ie when the start signal to
the compressor has been set.
5) READY-EXT.: This function corresponds to
the above READY function, but here it is not
required that EXTERNAL START NORMAL
STOP must be set for the output to be acti-
vated. The function works both in REMOTE
and AUTO.
Capacity down blocked
When the compressor is in max capacity in AUTO
or REMOTE, it is possible to lock the compressor
120/222
in this state by closing a digital input. See wiring
diagrams. The input overrules EXTERNAL
STARTING PERMISSION, NORMAL STOP.
In case the compressor runs in limited operation,
it will, however, reduce its capacity. When the
state of operation is back to normal, the compres-
sor will return to full load. See also Limitations.
If the input is connected while the compressor is
READY to start in AUTO or REMOTE, the com-
pressor will be started by force.
Power management system (PMS)
This function works in MANUAL, AUTO or RE-
MOTE operation. It is a kind of "an agreement to
start" system, consisting of one digital output
"Compressor ready to start", which is set when the
compressor is to start, as well as a digital input
"Permission to start OK". This input must be set
before the timer "PMS confirmation" expires in or-
der for the compressor to start.
The alarm "Power management system error" is
activated if the input "Permission to start OK" has
not been set before the timer "PMS confirmation"
expires.
The signal can be removed during operation with-
out stopping the compressor.
Cold store function
This function is connected to the regulators for ca-
pacity regulation of the compressor.
Usually, the compressor is going to start in AUTO
or REMOTE/MULITSAB if the measured value is
outside the neutral zone and a capacity require-
ment exists.
If COLD STORE FUNCTION has been selcected
in the menu CONFIG, the compressor will not
start until the measured value is outside the P
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

Band. After this, it will regulate normally in accord- pressor is now going to start within the period of
ance with the set point. time set in the timer START HPRESS.
Fig. 7.1 After this, the compressors will regulate normally
Example of cold store function
on the capacity regulator.
Please note that the last compressor in operation
UNISAB II is set for suction
pressure regulation with in a MULTISAB system (usually the no 1 com-
Set point (Sp) = -40°C pressor in the starting sequence) will not stop on
Neutral zone (Nz) = 4 K
Proportional band (Pb) = 5 K
the timer STOP DELAY. It can only be stopped by
NORMAL opening the input EXT START, NORMAL STOP,
Suct.press (°C/R) which makes the compressor stop for a moment.
-33
1 Pb = 5 K
-38 Oil return (reciprocating compressors)
-40 Nz = 4 K
Pb = 5 K The solenoid valve for oil return from the oil sepa-
rator/oil reservoir to the compressor will be open
1 Compressor start when the compressor starts and an ON signal is
(Just outside Nz)
issued from one digital input (or in the case of
COLD STORE FUNCTION
two-stage compressors two digital input).
Suct.press (°C/R)
0178_432_en.fm

1 In case of a one-stage compressor, only the digital

-33
Pb = 5 K input for high-pressure oil separator is used. Here,
-38
-40 Nz = 4 K the input must be ON before the digital output oil
Pb = 5 K return is set.
In case of two-stage compressors where both the
1 Compressor start IP and HP part may have their own oil separator,
(Just outside Pb)
the digital inputs INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE
OIL RETURN and HIGH PRESSURE OIL RE-
Note on screw compressors TURN are used. Here, both inputs must be ON
before setting the digital output for oil return.
It is not recommended to use the cold store
function on screw compressors! From version 1.10 the opening of the solenoid
valve(s) for oil return can be combined with an ad-
justable time delay.
HP on TWO-STAGE
This function is used on two-stage plants to start At compressor start the output(s) for oil return
HP compressors by force. is/are not opened until the time set in the timer OIL
RETURN has expired.
HP on TWO-STAGE must have been selected in
the menu CONFIG. The function only works in The time delay function will be disconnected if the
REMOTE/MULTISAB. timer OIL RETURN is set for 0 sec or when the
digital inputs for intermediate and high pressure
A compressor is started by force by closing the in-
oil return are OFF.
put EXT START, NORMAL STOP. The first com-

0178-445 - ENG 121/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

The time delay OIL RETURN is set in the timer

picture TIMER I TIMER SETUP.
DEF. REFRIGERANT R000

Oil heating TEMP: PRESS (ABS):

Oil heating is NOT a configuration point, but it has

-90 °C/R 00.00 BAR
various functions depending on whether the com-
pressor in question is configured as a reciprocat- -85 °C/R 00.00 BAR
ing or a screw compressor.
-80 °C/R 00.00 BAR
Screw compressors
-75 °C/R 00.00 BAR
A heating element will be connected while the
compressor is not in operation and there is no -70 °C/R 00.00 BAR
temperature regulation.
-65 °C/R 00.00 BAR
Reciprocating compressors
The heating element outlet is activated by de- -60 °C/R 00.00 BAR

creasing oil temperature. This function is active

-55 °C/R 00.00 BAR
both at compressor stand-still and when the com-
pressor is in operation. -50 °C/R 00.00 BAR

The set point of this value is set in picture OIL -45 °C/R 00.00 BAR
TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2. The set
point has a fixed hysteresis of 5K. -40 °C/R 00.00 BAR

Ex: Set point 2 = 35°C: -35 °C/R 00.00 BAR

Heating starts at 35°C and stops at (35+5) = 40°C.
-30 °C/R 00.00 BAR

Definition of refrigerant R000 -25 °C/R 00.00 BAR

If the refrigerant used cannot be found in the list of -20 °C/R 00.00 BAR
refrigerants - see section Configuration - it is pos-
sible to select a user defined refrigerant designat- -15 °C/R 00.00 BAR

ed R000 (the R000 designation does not refer to

-10 °C/R 00.00 BAR
any known refrigerant).
-5 °C/R 00.00 BAR
Before selecting R000 in SETUP I CONFIG en-
ter the data for the substances (the refrigerant 00 °C/R 00.00 BAR
curve) contained in the refrigerant used.
05 °C/R 00.00 BAR
In the menu SETUP I CALIB I DEF. REFRIG-
ERANT R000, the following picture will appear: 10 °C/R 00.00 BAR

15 °C/R 00.00 BAR

20 °C/R 00.00 BAR

122/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

25 °C/R 00.00 BAR 70 °C/R 00.00 BAR

30 °C/R 00.00 BAR 75 °C/R 00.00 BAR

35 °C/R 00.00 BAR 80 °C/R 00.00 BAR

40 °C/R 00.00 BAR

For BAR/°C, enter the pressure as absolute pres-
45 °C/R 00.00 BAR sure in 1/100 BAR. For temperatures enter values
between -90°C and +80°C with intervals of 5°C.
50 °C/R 00.00 BAR
Each pressure value in the table must be given a
55 °C/R 00.00 BAR
certain value.
The pressure can be entered in the range of 00.00
60 °C/R 00.00 BAR
and 99.99 BAR. The table has been initialized to
65 °C/R 00.00 BAR 00.00 BAR.
0178_432_en.fm

0178-445 - ENG 123/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance

124/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

8. Calibration
Before initial compressor start-up and after Insufficient or incorrect setting of pressure
service1), adjustments of transducers and position transducers may lead to compressor
transmitters must be carried out. Their values breakdown or personal injury.
have usually been preset by the factory, but a re- The temperature sensors must be calibrated as
check must be made before start-up. This is very they are connected electrically with four conduc-
important as failure to adjust may lead to malfunc- tors, which automatically makes up for line resist-
tion during operation. ance.
1) Eg in connection with replacement of CPU
prints, relay prints, pressure transducers or batter- Pressure transducers
ies. See also section Service. Calibrate the pressure transducers at atmos-
pheric pressure in the compressor.
Use the following pressure transducers:
Table 10
Unit = BAR COMPRESSOR TYPE
Max.
MEAS.POINT SAB/VMY SMC TSMC/ HPC/HPO MAX.
0178_433_en_2.02.fm

permissible
TCMO PRESS. deviation at
ATM.PRESS

SUCT.PRESS. 33 +/- 0.2

-1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+25
55 +/- 0.5

DISCH.PRESS 55 +/- 0.5

-1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+59
200 +/- 1.2

OIL PRESS -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

DIFF PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

INTERM.PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

0178-445 - ENG 125/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

Select the menu CALIBRATE, and the following As it appears from the above example, the meas-
picture will be displayed: ured pressure levels are not 0.0 Bar. Consequent-
ly calibration must be carried out.

CALIBRATE Place the cursor on SUCT. ADJUST and use the

PRESS.TRANSDUCER G key to change the value.
BRINE TEMP
Now change the value to the value SUCT. AD-
CAPACITY
JUST is showin, ie 0.2 Bar with opposite sign.
MOTOR FREQ
Vi POSITION
Note that the adjusting value is in 1/100.
4 - 20 mA INPUT Change SUCT. ADJUST to the value -.20.
AUX. OUTPUT
Adjust the other pressure levels in the same way.
CAP. LIMITS
DEF. REFRIGERANT R000
However, note that DIFF. PRESS is relevant only
for screw compressors and IMED. PRESS only for
Note that some of the entries in the CALIBRATE two-stage reciprocating compressors.
menu are described in other chapters of this man- The following picture should now appear:
ual.
With the cursor on PRESS.TRANSDUCER, press
SUCT. PRESS .00 BAR
I and the following picture will appear: SUCT. ADJUST -.20 BAR
DISC. PRESS 0.0 BAR
DISC. ADJUST .30 BAR
SUCT. PRESS .20 BAR
OIL PRESS 0.0 BAR
SUCT. ADJUST .00 BAR
OIL ADJUST -.10 BAR
DISC. PRESS -0.3 BAR
DIFF. PRESS 0.0 BAR
DISC. ADJUST .00 BAR
DIFF. ADJUST ..10 BAR
OIL PRESS 0.1 BAR
IMED. PRESS 0.0 BAR
OIL ADJUST .00 BAR
IMED. ADJUST -.10 BAR
DIFF. PRESS -0.1 BAR
DIFF. ADJUST .00 BAR
The pressure transducer calibration has now
IMED. PRESS 0.1 BAR
IMED. ADJUST .00 BAR
been carried out correctly.

Note: The pressure values shown are examples Brine temperature

only. At atmospheric pressure the value of the
Place the cursor on BRINE TEMP and press the
pressure transducer must be within the limits for
I key once. The following picture will appear:
"Max. permissible deviation at atm.pressure" as
indicated in the above table. Is this not the case,
the value will be outside its tolerance and must be BRINE TEMP 18.9°C

replaced. BRINE ADJUST 0.0°C

The pressure levels are measured in BAR (rela- The BRINE TEMP value is the immediate value
tive pressure) and at atmospheric pressure the measured by the sensor. If a test measuring with
reading must show 0.0 Bar to be correct. a precision thermometer shows eg 18.7°C at the
sensor, adjustment can be made.

126/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Place the cursor on BRINE ADJUST and change
the value to -0.2°C. BRINE TEMP will now be
18.7°C (18.9-0.2), and adjustment has taken
place.
Note that it is only possible to adjust BRINE TEMP
- not the other temperature sensors.
Calibration of capacity slide signal
Software calibration of the capacity slide position
signal can be used if it is not possible to calibrate
the transmitter itself. See below for information on
software calibration.
Calibration of Vi slide signal
Software calibration of the Vi slide position signal
can be used if it is not possible to calibrate the
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
transmitter itself. See below for information on
software calibration.
Calibration of motor frequency signal
When compressor capacity is regulated wholly or
partly by changes in the motor speed, the motor
frequency signal from the frequency converter
can be calibrated in this menu field.
Motor current
The reading of motor current can be calibrated as
described in section Configuration, pos. 19.
Hydraulic slide systems
(certain screw compressors)
The built-in capacity slide position transmitter as
well as the Vi slide position transmitter must be
adjusted correctly to ensure safe and stable slide
control. This adjustment must always be carried
out mechanically as described in section Trans-
mitter adjustment. Additionally, the capacity signal
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
can be adjusted by software as described in sec-
tion Software adjustment.
Software adjustment
When the capacity position transmitter has been
adjusted mechanically (see section Transmitter
adjustment), it can be fine adjusted by selecting
SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY.
CAPACITY XXX.X %
CAP. ZERO AD XX.X %
CAP. 100 ADJ XX.X %
Follow the same procedure as described for ca-
pacity slide calibration in section Transmitter ad-
justment.
0 % calibration is carried out with the capacity
slide in minimum position. If CAPACITY is not
showing 0.0 %, but eg 1.5 %, position the cursor
on CAP. ZERO AD and change the calibration val-
ue to -1.5 % with the G key.
100 % calibration is carried out with the capacity
slide in maximum position.
If CAPACITY is not showing 100.0 %, but eg 95.8
%, position the cursor on
CAP. 100 ADJ and change the calibration value to
4.2 % with the G key.
Transmitter adjustment
To ensure a safe and stable movement of the
slides, the built-in position transmitter must be ad-
justed correctly in the mechanical minimum and
maximum of the slide. Furthermore, the slide ve-
locity must be adjusted so that hunting is avoided.
See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-
pressor regulation.
Position transmitter
For measuring of slide position, the compressor is
fitted with a position transmitter, which yields 4 -
20 mA to UNISAB II. There will always be fitted a
transmitter at the capacity slide whereas there
127/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

may be fitted a transmitter at the volume ratio slide

in case the compressor is made for automatic Vi
regulation.
There are four types of position transmitter.
Turning Transmitter(for capacity and Vi) for SAB
110, SAB 128, SAB 163 and SAB 202.
Fig. 8.1
Short-Stroke Transmitter for SAB 283, SAB 355
Vi, from Gram Refrigeration to GSV, RWF capac-
ity and Vi) and capacity for GST.
Fig. 8.4

4.5 4.
3.5
3. 2
100%
2.5 3
SPAN + ZERO 1

No. 3
2.
0%

Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB

110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB
83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330.
Fig. 8.2 Adjusting capacity measuring system
for turning transmitter
ALU-Tube The turning transmitter has two ways of adjust-
2
3
1 ment. The cover must be removed before adjust-
ment.
In the following drawing(see Fig. 8.5) the zero and
Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB
span adjusting screws of the position transmitter
283.
are shown.
Fig. 8.3

ALU-Tube
3
2 1

128/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

Fig. 8.5

Slide position
4.5 4.
Volume ratio 3.5
1 = 4 - 20 mA
3. 2
2 = + 24 VDC
Approx min pos 100%
3 = GND
0% 2.5 3
SPAN + ZERO 1

No. 3
2.
0%

T0177063_0

With the cap/Vi slide in minimum position, adjust The following picture will appear:
zero until the display shows 0%. With the cap/Vi KAPACITY XX
slide at maximum positon, adjust span until the CAP. POS XX

display shows 100%. VI POSITION XX

RUNNING XX
Capacity slide adjustment
0178_433_en_2.02.fm

Start the compressor in MANUAL and make sure

that the capacity slide is in minimum. Adjust the
zero screw of the transmitter until the display
shows 0%.
Now bring the slide to its maximum position (eg
when the current consumption is no longer rising),
and adjust the span until the display shows 100%.
Return the slide to minimum and check.
Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi
Follow the same procedure as above, but note
that adjustment must be made each time the Vi
position is changed.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto V i Adjust the capacity slide position as above under
To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the
Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide
is brought to minimum the following way: Start the
compressor in MANUAL, select SETUP I and
then CAPACITY I.
Select the Vi POSITION and press I to the follow-
ing picture:
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will
adjust the Vi slide automatically.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change
the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide
in minimum position.
Capacity slide adjustment.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point
For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero
point setting, there are two applicable methods to
ensure that the automatic zero point setting does
not influence the adjusting of the transmitter zero.
1) Do not set the zero until the compressor has
stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.

0178-445 - ENG 129/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
2) Disconnect the automatic zero point setting
while setting the transmitter zero. This can be
done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the pic-
ture SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR.
Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 as soon
as the capacity slide adjustment is accomplished.
It is important that the compressor only runs for a
brief period of time when the automatic zero point
setting is disconnected.
Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi
It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set
correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
slide up to 20-30%.
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION I and the fol-
lowing picture will appear:
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi
slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
minimum position.
Return with H to the picture:
CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX
VI POSITION XX
RUNNING XX
and adjust the zero screw of the Vi position trans-
mitter until the reading out for the Vi-position is 0%
in the display.
Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the
above picture where the Vi position is now going
to rise. Wait until it does not rise any further and
130/222
adjust the span screw of the transmitter until the
display shows 100%.
Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-
mum.
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi
control. Besides, UNISAB II will change to auto-
matic Vi control itself after the compressor has
been stopped.
See also Adjusting slide velocity in the Compres-
sor regulation section.
Adjusting capacity measuring system for
Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 110, SAB
128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB 83, SAB
85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330
As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted
with a single calibration button surrounded by a
green and red LED.
Fig. 8.6
Calibration push botton
LED-Supply
LED-Digital output
Plug Connection
Out 4-20mA
Supply +24V DC
Common-
GND
During normal operation the red LED is flashing
rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con-
stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is
in 0% position.
Calibration is carried out as follows:
Note: Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
1) Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five
minutes before calibration.
2) Press the calibration button for five seconds
to get the transmitter in calibration mode.
The red LED will change from normal flash
to OFF.
3) With stopped compressor, press the calibra-
tion button once. The red LED will switch
ON immediately. After ten seconds the red
LED will turn OFF again, indicating that it is
ready for 100% calibration.
4) Start the compressor and increase capacity
to its maximum, and press the calibration
button twice. The red LED will start flashing
quickly. After ten seconds the red LED will
change to normal flash rate, indicating that
the calibration has been completed.
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
To make sure that the slide is in maximum
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow
the capacity button to be activated after
100% indication in the display has been
reached) it is recommended to set “CAP
100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of
the transmitter has been completed and the
slide remains in maximum position. See the
Software Calibration section earlier in this
section. The slide indication in the display
must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-
creased further either automatically by UN-
ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-
ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated
correctly.
5) If capacity could be increased to more than
90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again
from point 1 but keep -10% in “CAP 100
ADJ”.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” at what it was before
the calibration or until the capacity shows
100%.
7) The calibration will be remembered even in
case of a power failure.
To return to “Factory Set Point”, press the CAL.
Switch for twenty seconds. The green and red
LED will give a short flash (one after the other).
The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is perma-
nently available. However, during calibration the
signal is based on the default calibration values,
so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor
100% at maximum capacity!
Note that it is possible to return to the default cal-
ibration values by keeping the CAL Switch
pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the
transmitter manufacturer's default values, which
are reset. These values may differ very much from
the correct values for the compressor in question.
Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flash-
ing briefly a couple of times.
Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod
for SAB 283.
For type part no. 1373-038
Note: For long-stroke transmitters with part no.
1373-057 calibration and terminal connection are
similar to that of SAB 110, SAB 128 etc. Please
see section on preceeding page.
As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted
with a single calibration button surrounded by a
green and red LED. During normal operation the
red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED
is switched on constantly when the transmitter is
in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when
the transmitter is in 0% position.
131/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

Fig. 8.7

Long-Stroke SAB 283

Calibration‘s push button

PLUG CONNECTION: 1 = SUPPLY, +11 to 32V DC

LED-supply/operation
2 = COMMON -, 0V DC
3 = OUT, 4-20mA LED-digital
3
output (option)
= GND
2 1

DIA.
7mm
3

2 1

60mm

74mm

Calibration is carried out as follows:
Note: Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.
1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five
minutes before calibration.
2. With stopped compressor, press the calibra-
tion button once. The red LED will switch
ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn
OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibra-
tion.
3. Start the compressor and move the pis-
ton/alu tube to 100% position and press the
calibration button again. The red LED will
start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the
calibration will be completed and the red
LED will flash normally.
4) To make sure that the slide is in maximum
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow
the capacity button to be activated after
100% indication in the display has been
reached) it is recommended to set “CAP
100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of
the transmitter has been completed and the
slide remains in maximum position. See the
Software Calibration section earlier in this
section. The slide indication in the display
must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-
creased further either automatically by UN-
ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-
ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated
correctly.
5) If capacity could be increased to more than
90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again
from point 1 but keep -10% in “CAP 100
ADJ”.
6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” at what it was before
the calibration or until the capacity shows
100%.
Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity Rod
For part no. 1373-037
Note: For short-stroke transmitters with part no.
1373-061 calibration and terminal connection are
similar to that of SAB 100, SAB 128 etc. Please
see preceeding section.

132/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

for GST, GSV and RWF from Gram Refrigeration calibration button again. The red LED will
and short-stroke volumen rod for GSV, RWF and start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the
SAB 283 and SAB 355. calibration will be completed and the red
Fig. 8.8 LED will flash normally.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto Vi
The capacity slide movement must be adjusted
Short-Stroke with the Vi slide in minimum position.
The Vi slide is taken to minimum position in the fol-
LED-Supply
Calibration push botton lowing way:
Start the compressor in MANUAL and select CA-
LED-Digital output
PACITY I . The following picture will appear:
Plug Connection

CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX
VI POSITION XX
RUNNING XX
1 = Supply, 24V DC
0178_433_en_2.02.fm

2 = Common -, 0V DC
3 = Out, 4-20mA Select VI POSITION and press I to the following
= GND
picture:

As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted

with a single calibration button surrounded by a SETPOINT 1 0.0%

green and red LED. During normal operation the

red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED
is switched on constantly when the transmitter is
in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when
the transmitter is in 0% position.
Capacity calibration is carried out as follows:
Note: Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.
1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum five
minutes before calibration.
2. With stopped compressor, press the calibra-
tion button once. The red LED will switch
ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn
OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibra-
tion.
3. Start the compressor and move the pis-
ton/alu tube to 100% position and press the
In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi
slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
minimum position.
Adjust the capacity slide position as described
above under Capacity slide adjustment.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point
For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero
point setting, two methods can be used to ensure
that the automatic zero point setting does not af-
fect the adjustment of the transmitter zero.
1. Do not set the zero until the compressor has
stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.

0178-445 - ENG 133/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
2. Disconnect the automatic zero point setting
while setting the transmitter zero. This is
done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the
picture SETUP I CONFIG.
Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0
once the capacity slide adjustment has
been completed. The compressor is only
allowed to run for a brief period of time
with the automatic zero point setting dis-
connected.
Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi
It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set
correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
slide up to 20-30%.
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION and the fol-
lowing picture will appear:
SETPOINT 1 0.0%
In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi
slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the
Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
minimum position.
Return with H to the picture:
CAPACITY XX
CAP. POS XX
VI POSITION XX
RUNNING XX
Wait until Vi does not decrease any further and
push the calibration button once. The red LED is
now constantly ON. After 10 sec. the red LED will
turn OFF to indicate that it is ready for 100% cali-
bration.
134/222
Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the
above picture where the Vi position will increase.
Wait until it does not increase any further and
push the calibration button once again. The red
LED will flash quickly and after 10 sec. the calibra-
tion is completed and the red LED will flash nor-
mally.
Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-
mum.
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi
control. UNISAB II will change to automatic Vi
control after the compressor has been stopped.
See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-
pressor regulation.
Electrical slide systems (certain screw
compressors)
The built-in capacity slide position transmitter
must be adjusted correctly to ensure safe and sta-
ble slide control. This adjustment must always be
carried out as described in section Transmitter ad-
justment.
Afterwards, the capacity signal must be
adjusted by software as described in section
Software adjustment.
Manual slide positioning
In contrary to hydraulic slides, the electrical ca-
pacity slide can be positioned manually for test.
This is useful both when performing transmitter
adjustment and software adjustment.
Select SETUP I CONTROL I COMPRESSOR-
CONTROL = STOPPED and then SETUP I
CALIBRATE I CAPACITY. The picture shown in
section Software adjustment will appear. While
this picture is open (and still STOPPED mode), it
is possible to move the capacity slide by means of
the E and F buttons.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

Note that when reaching the end stop, the alarm
CAPACITY ERROR will be displayed after two
seconds. Release the button at once and reset the
alarm.
Fig. 8.9
Transmitter adjustment
The capacity transmitter is fitted with a single cal-
ibration button surrounded by a green and a red
LED as shown in the drawing.

Calibration
push button LED-Working
LED-Position (red)
(green)

Normally
not visible.
For calibration
remove cover
0178_433_en_2.02.fm

During normal operation the red LED is flashing
rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con-
stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is
in 0% position.
Calibration is carried out as follows:
1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five
minutes before calibration.
tion transmitter is ready for 100% calibra-
tion.
4. Increase capacity to its maximum and press
the calibration button twice. The red LED
will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds
the red LED will change to normal flash rate,
indicating that calibration has been complet-
ed.

2. Press the calibration button for five seconds It is possible to ignore points 3 or 4 or both. Press-
to get the transmitter in calibration mode. ing the calibration button for five seconds in cali-
The red LED will change from normal flash bration mode will bring the transmitter back to nor-
to OFF. mal operation mode.

3. Decrease capacity to its minimum and press The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is perma-
the calibration button once. The red LED nently available. However, during calibration the
will turn ON. After ten seconds the red LED signal is based on the default calibration values,
will turn OFF again, indicating that the posi-

0178-445 - ENG 135/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration

so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor %), select

100% at maximum capacity! CAP 100ADJ = 1.7 %.
Note that it is possible to return to the default cal-
ibration values by keeping the CAL Switch Factory setting
pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the During configuration it is possible to bring
transmitter manufacturer's default values, which UNISAB II back to its factory settings.
are reset. These values may differ very much from
If a factory reset is carried out, the following
the correct values for the compressor in question.
points will be affected:
Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flash-
ing briefly a couple of times. - Alarm and warning limits

Software adjustment - Timer setup

When the capacity position transmitter has been - Regulator settings
adjusted (see section Transmitter adjustment), - State of control
the capacity must be further adjusted. It is recom-
mended to introduce a calculation offset of 2% to The factory settings appear from the tables in sec-
ensure that the slide does not collide with the end tions Alarms and Warnings, Timers as well as
stops. Collisions will reduce slide motor service Compressor regulation.
life, etc. Before carring out factory reset, STOP the com-
Select SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY pressor.
Select CONFIG I FACTORY RESET and
change from NO to YES.
CAPACITY XXX.X %
CAP. ZERO AD XX.X % Now press H and UNISAB II will display the fol-
CAP 100 ADJ XX.X % lowing:

Decrease capacity to its minimum. Change CAP.

ZERO AD so that a value of -2.0% is displayed for CONFIGURATION CHANGED
RESTARTS!
CAPACITY.
PLEASE WAIT
If capacity is eg 0.3 %
(when CAP. ZERO AD = 0.0%), Within a few seconds the operation will be com-
select CAP. ZERO AD = - 2.3%. pleted and UNISAB II can be adjusted to the actu-
Increase capacity to its maximum. Change CAP al operating conditions.
100 ADJ so that a value of 102.0 % is displayed REMEMBER to fill in the forms for actual settings.
for CAPACITY.
These forms are included in the Starting-up Man-
If capacity is eg 100.3% (when CAP 100ADJ = 0.0
ual.

136/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

9. Trouble shooting
3 SOFTWARE VERSION
4 DIGITAL INPUTS
If irregularities occur in connection with the run-
5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ning of the compressor, it is possible to inspect
6 ANALOG INPUTS
UNISAB II to determine the cause of these irregu-
7 ANALOG OUTPUTS
larities. 8 NO OF ALARMS

Please note that even though the voltage to 9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD

UNISAB II is disconnected, there may still be live 10 SERIAL NUMBER

11 EXAMINE MEMORY
wires containing unknown voltage.
12 NEW PASSWORD
Before beginning the trouble-shooting, disconnect 13 POWER ON
the main supply to the compressor motor to pre- 14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.
vent it from starting inadvertently. 15 COP
16 PROFICOM
There are light diodes on the printed circuit board.
17 ROTATUNE PISTON
These diodes make it possible to state the condi-
tion of the in- and outputs. It is also possible to en-
ter different menu pictures and have various
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms
0178_434_en_2.02.fm

states displayed. With the cursor in this field and a pressure on I a

picture with the most recent alarm will appear.
Finally, UNISAB II includes a function, which in
case of an alarm will store the operating situation Example:
including time and date. This makes it possible
subsequently to inspect this information on the ALARM 940715-0740
display, which is particularly useful when search- HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
ing for the cause of a compressor shutdown.
The picture shows that on 15 July 1994 at 07:40
In this way UNISAB II can store up to 30 alarm sit-
hrs an alarm was activated due to high discharge
uations where the most recent alarm will replace
pressure.
the oldest one.
To inspect old alarms, press K and the previous
An interruption of the voltage to UNISAB II will not
alarm will appear.
cause any loss of information. Thus, the informa-
tion can be displayed again once the supply volt- When the alarm of interest is displayed, press I
age has been restored. and the following picture will appear:

Diagnosis pictures 1 CTRL STATE

2 MEASURE VALUES
If the menu DIAGNOSIS is selected, the following
3 IMPUT STATE
picture will appear:
4 OUTPUT STATE

DIAGNOSIS Under this menu every piece of operating informa-

1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS tion which existed at the moment of the alarm is
2 MISC. FUNCTIONS stored.

0178-445 - ENG 137/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

In the alarm situation HIGH DISCHARGE PRES- EXT.INPUT 0.0 %

SURE, do as follows to inspect the situations 1-4. MOTOR CURR 113A

With the cursor on CTRL STATE and I the fol- This picture shows all the measuring values con-
lowing picture will appear: nected to the above alarm. Note that not all values
are relevant for all compressor types.
CONTROL MANUAL If a different alarm situation is selected, a similar
DISCHARGE LIM set of measuring values will appear.
START NO 1
Use H to get back to the menu, select INPUT
SYSTEM NO 1
STATE and press I , and the following picture will
The compressor has been in MANUAL mode and appear:
has been limited due to high pressure. Further-
more, it has been programmed to START NO 1 D.INPUT 1 1
and SYSTEM NO 1. D.INPUT 2 1

Use H to go back to the menu, select MEASURE D.INPUT 3 1

D.INPUT 4 1
VALUES and press I ,and the following picture
D.INPUT 5 0
will appear:
D.INPUT 6 0
D.INPUT 7 0
SUCT.TEMP 20.3°C D.INPUT 8 0
SUCT.PRESS -10.4°C/R D.INPUT 9 1
SUCT. SUPERH 30.7°C D.INPUT 10 0
DISCH.TEMP 68.7°C D.INPUT 11 0
DISCH.PRESS 44.7°C/R
DISCH.SUPERH 24.0°C Here the state of all digital inputs connected to the
BRINE TEMP 22.1°C selected alarm can be read.
OIL TEMP 39.1°C
0 = The input has been open
OIL PRESS 3.9 BAR
1 = The input has been closed.
DIFF.PRESS 0.0 BAR
INTERM.TEMP 22.1°C Use H to go back to the menu, select OUTPUT
INTERM.PRESS 0.0 BAR STATE and press I , and the following picture will
VI POSITION 62.0 % appear:
CAP POSITION 29.8 %

138/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.

D.OUTPUT 1 0 15 COP

D.OUTPUT 2 0 16 PROFICOM

D.OUTPUT 3 0 17 ROTATUNE PISTON

D.OUTPUT 4 0
D.OUTPUT 5 0 2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions
D.OUTPUT 6 0
This picture includes four items:
D.OUTPUT 7 0
D.OUTPUT 8 0
D.OUTPUT 9 0 SUCT. RAMP L X.X°C/R
D.OUTPUT 10 0 SUCT. SUPERH XX.X°C
D.OUTPUT 11 0 CAPACITY XXX.X SEC
D.OUTPUT 12 1 BRAKE DLY X.X SEC
D.OUTPUT 13 1
D.OUTPUT 14 0 The first item SUCT. RAMP L. shows the state of
D.OUTPUT 15 1 the suction ramp function. See section Limiting
D.OUTPUT 16 1
functions, Suction ramp.
D.OUTPUT 17 0
D.OUTPUT 18 0 The value shows the actual suction pressure limit,
0178_434_en_2.02.fm

which will be equal to the suction pressure set

Here the state of all digital outputs connected to point if the suction ramp is not active. When the
the selected alarm can be read. suction ramp is active, the value will decrease by
0 = The output has been open 1°C every N seconds, where N is the selected val-
1 = The output has been activated. ue of the SUCT. RAMP timer.

Tables 11 and 12 below show the numbering of The second item SUCT. SUPERH is the same as
in-/outputs on screw and reciprocating compres- the suction superheat set point 2, which is used by
sors respectively. the High Discharge Pipe Temperature Limiter.
See section Limiting functions, Special limiters.
Return to the previous menu by pressing H :
The third and the fourth items are explained in
section Compressor regulation, Electrical slide
DIAGNOSIS
control.
1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS
2 MISC. FUNCTIONS
3 SOFTWARE VERSION 3) Diagnosis I Software version
4 DIGITAL INPUTS Here it can be checked which program version is
5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS running in UNISAB II:
6 ANALOG INPUTS
7 ANALOG OUTPUTS Example:
8 NO OF ALARMS
9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD
UNISAB II
10 SERIAL NUMBER
2.00
11 EXAMINE MEMORY
YORK Refrigeration
12 NEW PASSWORD
000119 13 : 46
13 POWER ON

0178-445 - ENG 139/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs 6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs

In this picture it is always possible to check the ac- (Pressures, Temperatures, Current)
tual state of the digital inputs both at compressor In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-
standstill and during operation. tual state of the analog inputs both at compressor
The inputs are numbered from 1 to 11 and their standstill and during operation.
particular status is displayed. The picture looks as follows:
0 = Input open
1 = Input closed PRESS INP 1 XXXX
PRESS INP 2 XXXX
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the in-
PRESS INP 3 XXXX
puts. PRESS INP 4 XXXX
PT 100 INP 1 XXXX
5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs PT 100 INP 2 XXXX
PT 100 INP 3 XXXX
In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-
PT 100 INP 4 XXXX
tual state of the digital outputs both at compressor
CURR. XXXX
standstill and during operation. EXT. XXXX

0 = Output open CAP. XXXX

VI. XXXX
1 = Output closed
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the out- It is 12 bit A/D-converted raw values of the input
puts. signal which are displayed.
The displayed raw values are interpreted in the
following way (see tables below):
Pressure
Reading 7 752 7310 8191
Input from pres.transmit. (VDC) 0 0.5 4.5 5.0

Pt100
Reading -2000 -700 +1850 +2000
Temperature (°C) -200 -70 +185 +200

Ext, Cap, Vi
Reading 7 1606 4818 8030
Input (mA) 0 4 12 20

Curr.
Reading 7 5910
Input (Amp AC) 0 1.0

Table 12 shows the numbering of the analog in- puts.

140/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs
ANALOG OUTPUTS 0.0%
TEST MODE NO
TEST VALUE 0.0%
In this menu picture it is possible to see which an-
alog output value (in percentage) UNISAB II is
transmitting to the equipment to which it is con-
nected. The signal is a 4-20 mA signal and is usu-
ally used for regulating the speed of a frequency
converter. When using analog regulation of the
frequency converter, it is possible at the same
time to regulate the capacity and Vi slides digitally.
This requires that UNISAB II be fitted with an add-
on printed circuit board (UNICOM IF) between re-
lay print and CPU print. The add-on board is addi-
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
tional equipment. See section Configuration for
detailed information on the use of this board.
As long as the above menu picture is shown in the
display, it is possible to select test mode = YES
and enter a test value between 0 and 100%.
UNISAB II will thus transmit an mA signal corre-
sponding to the test value.
Note: Do not let the compressor motor run when
using test mode as the motor revolutions will fol-
low the changes in the signal. However, test mode
can be used to check whether the frequency con-
verter receives the signal correctly by reading the
analog input signal in the menu system of the con-
verter.
8) Diagnosis I No of alarms
The total number of alarms in the working life of
the control system is shown here.
Use K and J to inspect the list.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword
In this picture any application of the superuser
password including date and hour is registered.
Use K and J to inspect the list.
10) Diagnosis I Serial number
In this picture it is possible to read some of the in-
formation related to the EEPROM
SERIAL NO 123456
COMMISIONED 950101
ERASE EEPROM NO
The compressor serial no can be read.
The date of compressor start-up (date of initial
start-up) can be read.
By using a special password it is possible to erase
the EEPROM.
11) Diagnosis I Examine memory
This picture is used for software debugging. A
section of 8 bytes from the RAM store is shown on
the display. The starting address of this section,
which is the figure shown at the top to the left, can
be changed by means of H I and K J .
0000 00 00 70 3A
0004 00 00 00 00
12) Diagnosis J New password
In this picture it is possible to change the pass-
word. See section Operating the UNISAB II con-
trol.
141/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

13) Diagnosis I Power on

In this picture it can be checked how many times COP XX.X
COP CARNOT X.XX
the power supply for UNISAB II has be reconnect-
COP MECH. X.XX
ed. This menu is used for trouble shooting.
COOLING OUTPUT XXXX KW
MASS FLOW XXXX kg/h

POWER ON SHAFT POWER XXXX KW

ABSORBED POWER XXXX KW
020606 22:53:31
MOT. EFFICIENCY XX.X %
+00000011 VOL. FLOW XXXX m3/h
OVH.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg
SAT.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos.
ENTALPI H1 XXXX kj/kg
The current calculated value of the zero point as ENTALPI H4 XXXX kj/kg
well as any manual setting value of the zero point ENTALPI H2 XXXX kj/kg
can be read in this picture: LIQUID TEMP XX.X °C

A more comprehensive description of the COP

CALCULATED ZERO 22% function and the setting of this can be found in the
MANUAL ZERO 0.0% manual UNISAB II-COP.
CAP.POSITION 66.5%
16) Diagnosis I PROFICOM
CAPACITY 100.0%
Only for internal use within YORK Refrigera-
(current reading 0-40%) tion, Marine Group.
(manual adjustment 0-40%)
In this menu picture it can be checked how
(immediate slide position, 4-20 mA)
UNISAB II communicates with other equipment
(corrected capacity - as read)
using PROFIBUS communication. The use of
PROFIBUS communication in UNISAB II has not
15) Diagnosis I COP yet been completed. At the moment PROFIBUS
UNISAB II can be set to measure the compressor can therefore only be used for communication
COP values (Coefficient Of Performance) as well with Mitsubishi PLCs of the type FX2N.
as the mechanical efficiency and the Carnot effi-
ciency.
INIT MESS 0
The calculated COP values and a number of inter- I/0 LENGTH ERR 0
mediate calculations are shown in this picture: MODE 0
NEXT 0

17) Diagnosis I Rotatune piston

Only for internal use.

142/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs 12. Alarm

and outputs 13. Warning
Screw compressors 14. Aux. output (Compressor ready to start at
INPUTS: remote control, limit switch for capacity).
1. Compressor motor starter feedback 15. Starting request (PMS)
2. External starting permission - normal stop- 16. Compressor motor starting signal
ping procedure
17. Prelubrication pump starting signal
3. External starting permission - stop immedi-
18. Full flow pump (cooling fan) starting signal
ately
Reciprocating compressors
4. Starting request OK (PMS)
INPUTS:
5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
1. Compressor motor starter feedback
6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no
2 2. External starting permission - normal stop-
ping procedure
7. Oil pump motor starter feedback
3. External starting permission - stop immedi-
8. Full flow pump (cooling fan) motor starter
0178_434_en_2.02.fm

ately
feedback
4. Starting request OK(PMS)
9. Oil float switch
5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
10. Capacity down blocked
6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no
11. Thermistors in motor windings 2
OUTPUTS: 7. Thermostat for oil return control. Intermedi-
1. Capacity down ate pressure oil separator.
2. Capacity up 8. Thermostat for oil return control. High pres-
3. Volume down sure oil separator

4. Volume up 9. Not used

5. Economizer - suction line 10. Capacity down blocked

6. Economizer - liquid line 11. Thermistors in motor windings

7. Oil cooling system (HLI/BLI cooling) OUTPUTS:

8. Oil cooling system (not used in HLI/BLI cool- 1. Capacity stage no 1

ing) 2. Capacity stage no 2
9. Oil distribution pipe 3. Capacity stage no 3
10. Oil rectifier (Only MKD configuration; other- 4. Capacity stage no 4
wise not used) 5. Capacity stage no 5
11 Heating element 6. Capacity stage no 6

0178-445 - ENG 143/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

7. Capacity stage no 7 / intermediate pressure 13. Warning

injection 14. Aux. output, (Compressor ready to start at
8. Oil cooling / thermo pump / thermo pump remote control, limit switch for capacity).
solenoid valve for ventilation 15. Starting request (PMS)
9. Oil return 16. Compressor motor starting signal
10. Water cooling 17. Oil rectifier
11. Heating element 18. Not used
12. Alarm

144/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs 4. Interm.press.Not used

Screw compressors TSMC,TCMO
Pressures: 1. Suct.press.-1/+9 bar r
1. Suction pressure-1/+9 bar r 2. Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r
2. Discharge pressure-1/+25 bar r 3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r
3. Oil pressure-1/+25 bar r 4. Interm.press.-1/+25 bar r
4. Oil pressure before filter-1/+25 bar r HPC, HPO
Temperatures: 1. Suct.press.-1/+25 bar r
1. Suction temperature 2. Disch.press. -1/+59 bar r
2. Discharge temperature 3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r
3. Oil temperature 4. Interm.press.Not used
4. Brine or water temperature
Current inputs: Temperatures:
0178_434_en_2.02.fm

1. Capacity slide position4-20 mA 1. Suction temperature

2. Volume slide position/ 2. Discharge temperature

outside temp.4-20 mA 3. Oil temperature
3. Motor current0-1 A AC 4. Brine or water temperature (Intermedi-
4. External set point / ate temp. on TSMC, TCMO)
ext. measuring signal4-20 mA
Reciprocating compressors Current inputs:
Pressures: 1. Not used
SMC, CMO 2. Outside temperature4-20 mA
1. Suct.press.-/+9 bar r 3. Motor current0-1 A AC
2. Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r 4. External set point /
3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r ext. measuring signal4-20mA

0178-445 - ENG 145/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
Printed circuit board, light diodes
When opening the UNISAB II door, a number of
light diodes can be inspected on the printed circuit
boards.
The following signals have light diodes:
DIGITAL INPUTS (Green,12 pcs)
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (Red, 18 pcs)
COMMUNICATION (one red, one yellow, one
green)
SUPPLY (One red)
CPU PRINT (One green, one red)
Positioning and identification of these light diodes
can be seen from the following drawing.
DIGITAL INPUTS, DI1 to DI12 (Green)
The light diodes are marked from DI1 to DI12 and
the attached functions appear from the list of in-
puts.
Light in diode = input activated.
DIGITAL OUPUTS, DLR1 to DLR18 (Red)
The light diodes are marked from DLR1 to DLR18
and the attached functions appear from the list of
outputs.
146/222
Light in diode = output activated.
COMMUNICATION DL12 (red), DL14 (yellow),
DL13 (green)
In case UNISAB II communicates with other units,
the flashing of the diodes must be irregular.
The red diode indicates that UNISAB II is trans-
mitting information whereas the green diode indi-
cates that information is being received.
SUPPLY, RST1 (red)
This diode will flash briefly while voltage is con-
nected to UNISAB II. During normal operation the
light is off.
In case the diode flashes repeatedly when voltage
is connected, there may be an error in the voltage
supply.
CPU PRINT, ACT1 (green), RST1 (red)
The green light diode must flash irregularly when-
ever UNISAB II is electrified. A constant light or no
light is a sign of malfunction.
The red light diode must usually be off. It is only
on for brief moments in case the CPU tries to re-
start the program. This may only happen while
UNISAB II is switched on.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

Fig. 9.1 Printed circuit board with light diodes

TERMINALS RED Communication

Transmitter EPROM
YELLOW
GREEN
Receiver

DIGITAL
OUTPUTS CPU PRINT

1) Capacity slide down

RE1 2) Capacity stage
1) Capacity slide up
RE2
2) Capacity stage 2

RE3 1) Volume slide down GREEN RED

2) Capacity stage 3
ACT1 RST1
RE4 1) Volume slide up
2) Capacity stage 4
1) Economizer suction line
RE5
2) Capacity stage 5
1) Economizer liquid line
RE6
0178_434_en_2.02.fm

2) Capacity stage 6

Battery
1) HLI/BLI cooling
RE1
RE7
2) Capacity stage 7/intermed. press. injection
1) Oil cooling
RE8
2) Oil cooling/thermo pump
DIGITAL
RE9 1) Oil distribution pipe
2) Oil return INPUTS
1) Oil rectifier DI1 Compressor operation
RE10
2) Water cooling
DI2 EXT. start, normal stop
RE11 1) Heating element
2) Heating element DI3 EXT. start, immediate stop
DI4 Starting request (PMS)
RE12 Alarm
DI5 Regulator Sp1/Sp2
RE13 Warning DI6 Motor currentSp1/Sp2
1) Oil pump operation
RE14 DI7
AUX. output 2) Oil return interm.press
DI8 1) Full flow pump operation
RE15 2) Oil return high pressure
Starting request DI9 1) Oil flow switch
2) Not used
DI10
RE16 Compressor start Capacity down blocked
DI11 Thermistor (no light function)
RE17 1) Oil pump start
2) Oil rectifier DI12 Not used

RE18 1) Full flow pump

230 VAC 115 VAC 24 VAC

RED
1) Screw compressor
K22 RST1
2) Reciprocating compressor

0178-445 - ENG 147/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting

148/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.1 Error diagram no 1

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL operating mode

MANUAL
operation

Is there light No Select picture COMPRESSOR CTRL-

in yellow C MODE and adjust to MANUAL
on front?

Yes

Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP termi-

0178_435_en.fm

nals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode no. 3 on

Display No print. Can also be cheked in picture DIAGNOSIS I
=
DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.
READY

Yes

Display
Yes =
READY

No
Recipr./screw Screw
Prelubrication
No Yes
Contact
YORK Ref.

1 2

0178-445 - ENG 149/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.2 Error diagram no 2

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL mode, continued

1

Press A to start compressor.

3 Green light diode on front
flashes

Does Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-

OK Yes No sure control, if any. There must be
compres-
sor start? connection between terminals
125-126 and 127-128.

Check that input STARTING REQUEST PMS

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 is closed. Light Yes error mes-
in green diode no 4 on print. Can also be sage re-
checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I ceived
DIGITAL INPUT no 4 = 1.
No

Input Yes Is relay no 16

closed? Try again activated on No Contact
print when try- YORK Ref.
ing to start (red
light diode)?
No

Yes
Apply jumper, or check connec-
tions from terminals 116-117 to Check connection from terminals 118-
power management system. 119 to motor starter

Yes No Correct wiring

Connection connect.
OK?

Is there feed-
back on termi-
nals 41-42 from No Correct wiring
motor guard? connection
Green light di-
ode no 1 on
print.

Yes

Check pre-fuses and control volt-

age of motor guard.

150/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.3 Error diagram no 3

Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in MANUAL mode, continued

Press A to start compressor.

Green light diode flashes on front.

Yes Oil pump

starts?

No
Error mes- No
sage in oil 3 Check that input STARTING REQUEST
system? FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
PMS Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
error mes- Yes also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
Yes sage re- I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.
ceived?
Check wiring connec-
tion to oil float. When No
0178_435_en.fm

float has been activat-

ed, green light diode no No Input Yes Try again
9 will flash on print. closed?

Apply jumper, or check con-

nections from terminals 116-
No 117 to power management
Connection Correct wiring
system.
OK? connect.

Relay no 17
Yes is activated No Check that CONFIG I
PRELUBRIFICATION = YES.
on print. Red
Check float
light diode
function

Yes

Check connection from terminals 120-

121 to pump motor starter

Connection No Correct wiring

OK? connection

Yes
Check if feedback is recieved on termi-
nals 53-54 (green light diode no 7 on
print) from pump motor guard

Check pre-fuses and control voltage of Yes No Correct wiring

Connection
pump motor guard. connect.
OK?

0178-445 - ENG 151/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.4 Error diagram no 4

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode

Prepare for AUTOMATIC opera-

tion

Select regulating form in picture

CONFIG I CONTROL ON

Set Set point, neutral zone and

P. Band for chosen regulator

Select picture CTRL MODE and

set to AUTO

With C it is possible to change

between MANUAL and AUTO by
one single pressure. Adjust to
MANUAL (= light in yellow diode)

In CONFIG check that

AUTO START = YES and
AUTO STOP = YES

Check setting of START DELAY

in picture TIMER SETUP

Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP

No terminals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode
Display
no 3 on print. Can also be checked in picture
READY?
DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.

Yes

Yes
Display
READY?

No

4 5

152/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.5 Error diagram no 5

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued

4 5

Check that input EXT. START,

NORM. STOP terminals 43-44 is
closed. Light in green diode no 2
print. Can also be checked in pic-
ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL IN-
PUT no 2=1.

Yes Display =
0178_435_en.fm

READY?

Press C so that light in No

diode goes out = AUTO
Contact
YORK Ref.

Compressor can now begin start-up

phase depending on setting of regu-
lator. REMEMBER that start is de-
layed by timer START DELAY.

Is cool-
ing/heat- No Change set point or wait for cool-
ing re- ing/heating requirement.
quired?

Yes

Recipr./screw Screw
Prelubrication
No Yes

7 6

0178-445 - ENG 153/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.6 Error diagram no 6

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued

At compressor start-up
green light diode on front
will flash.

Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-

sure control, if any. There must be
connection between terminals 125-
Does com- 126 and 127-128.
Yes No
OK pressor
start?

PMS
Yes error
message
received?
Check that input STARTING RE-
QUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48
is closed. Light in green diode no. 4 No
on print. Can also be checked in pic-
ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT
no 4=1. Is relay no 16
activated on No
Contact
print when try-
YORK Ref.
ing to start (red
No Input Yes light diode)
closed? Try again

Yes
Apply jumper, or check con-
nections from terminals
116-117 to power manage- Check connection from terminals
ment system. 118-119 to motor starter

Yes No Correct wiring con-

Connection
OK? nection

Is there feedback
on terminals 41-42 No Correct wiring con-
from motor guard? nection
Green light diode
no 1 on print.

Yes

Check pre-fuses and control

fuses of motor guard.

154/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.7 Error diagram no 7

Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in AUTO mode, continued

At compressor start green light

diode on front will flash.

Check that input STARTING REQUEST

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
Oil pump Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
Yes also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
starts?
I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.

Error mes- No
No
sage in oil
system? No Input Yes
PMS Try again
Yes closed
7 error mes-
Yes sage
0178_435_en.fm

received?
Apply jumper, or check connec-
tions from terminal 116-117 to
Check wiring connec- power management system.
tion to oil float. When No
float has been activat-
ed, green light diode
no 9 will flash on print. Relay no
17 is acti- No Check that CONFIG I
vated on PRELUBRICATION = YES
print. Red
light diode.

Yes
Connec- No Correct
tion OK? wiring connect. Check connection from terminals 120-121 to
the pump motor starter.

Yes

Check float function No Correct wiring

Connection
connection
OK?

Yes

Check if feedback is received on terminals 53-54 on

green light diode no 7 on print from motor guard.

Check pre-fuses and control fuses of Yes Connection No Correct wiring

motor guard. connection
OK?

0178-445 - ENG 155/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.8 Error diagram no 8

General trouble shooting, UNISAB II

No light/text in display

Is diode on
No Is there light in Yes
CPU print
ACT1 flashing
any diodes on 8
relay card
green

Yes No

Check connection to Check supply on termi-

display. If necessary, nals L and N
pull out white plug and
refit.

Is
voltage No
correct?
9
Contact No Display
YORK Ref. Yes
OK?
Check that white code
Yes plug has been fitted.

Problem
solved

= 230 VAC

= 115 VAC
Display reads COPY
EEROM after power =24 VAC
cut

Probably defective bat- Is

tery Yes
plug
correct?
10

No

Replace battery. See Fit correct plug

section, Service, Bat-
tery

156/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.9 Error diagram no 9

CPU print may have to be re-

8 placed

Check voltage supply of any

9 loose connections, burnt fuses
or the like

Check voltage on terminals 141-

10 142 = 24 VAC

Transformer thermally
Is this
activated. May have to
OK
be replaced.

Check fuse in black re-

tainer.
0178_435_en.fm

Is this Replace fuse.

OK? Max 3 Amp.

Are terminals
29-32-37 short- Correct error
circuited to
frame?

Are terminals
29-30-33 or 37- Correct error
38 short-
circuited?

Are there any er-

rors in external Correct error or replace
components to component
term. 29-30; 32-
33; 37-38

Contact
YORK Ref.

0178-445 - ENG 157/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

158/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service

11. Service
In case some of the main parts of UNISAB II are a. Door in which display and keyboard are fit-
defective, it is possible to replace them. ted.
It is recommended to contact b. Relay print with wiring connections.
YORK Refrigeration before changing any of these c. CPU print fitted on relay print.
parts.
d. Transformer.
The main parts comprise:
The parts are shown below (see Fig. 11.1).
Fig. 11.1

Keyboard connection Display connection

EEPROM

PAL Battery
U17 EPROM U17 Cooling
plate Trans-
U18 EPROM U18 former
CPU print Fuse
Digital inputs
0178_436_en_2.02.fm

Empty socket!
NEVER use this
socket together
with sockets pos.
Digital outputs
U17and U18

Terminals

All replacements must be carried out with Replacement of CPU print

UNISAB II in a state of no voltage. Remember that
outside control voltage may be connected.
Disconnect the main supply to the motor to avoid
risk of indadvertent start-up.
Replacement of door
Remove the blue and white plugs leading to the
relay print (the two securing lugs must be bent a
little backwards). Remove the two fuse straps as
well as the earth connections.
Mount the new door in reverse order as opposed
to the dismounting process.
Connect supply voltage.
Dismantle the door completely to provide free ac-
cess to the printed circuit board.
Remove the screws with which the print is se-
cured. Get hold of the bottom of the print and pull
it out carefully. It may be fixed rather firmly as it is
positioned in two plugs with connection to the re-
lay print. It is important to pull at the side of the
print in which the plugs are positioned to avoid
pulling it out askew, thus damaging the print.
Move both EPROMS and EEPROM from the old
CPU print to the new one.
Important!
See also Replacement of EPROMS.

0178-445 - ENG 159/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Mount a new CPU print and door in reverse order
as opposed to the dismounting process.
When the above has been completed and the
control is switched on, the following picture will ap-
pear shortly in the display:
COPY EEPROM YES
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-
ured and the contents of the EEPROM, corre-
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be
copied into the CPU storeage.
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.
The setting is now the same as before the CPU
print was changed except for the calibration of
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem-
perature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. The language is now English. Select anoth-
er language if this is required. Enter the values
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set
time and date.
Replacement of CPU print and
EEPROM
If - as an exception - it proves necessary to insert
a new EEPROM in connection with the replace-
ment of a CPU print, the following procedure must
be observed.
Important!
See also Replacement of EPROM.
Mount the new parts and switch on the control.
The following picture will appears in the display:
160/222
SERIAL NO 0
Enter the compressor serial no and press the H
key. All three light diodes on the front will flash
shortly, and the display will show the picture CON-
FIG.
It is also necessary to enter the original setup, all
alarm and warning limits as well as set points,
which must be different from the factory setting.
Remember also to calibrate the pressure trans-
ducers.
These values are included in the Starting-up Man-
ual. Remember to set time and date. The lan-
guage is now English. Select another language if
this is required.
Replacement of relay print
Dismantle the door completely to provide free ac-
cess to the printed circuit board.
All connected wires on the relay print must be dis-
mounted, but first they must be marked so that
correct remounting is possible.
Remove the screws that hold the print and tilt the
print out of the plastic holders at the terminal row
on the long side of the print.
Pull the print off the guide opposite the terminal
row and out of the cabinet.
Move the CPU print with the EPROM and Serial
EPROM onto the new relay print.
Mount the new relay print in reverse order as op-
posed to the dismounting procedure and connect
the marked wires in the correct order.
When the above has been completed and the
control is switched on, the following picture will ap-
pear shortly in the display:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
COPY EEPROM YES
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-
ured and the contents of the EEPROM, corre-
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be
copied into the CPU storeage.
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.
The settting is now the same as before the CPU
print was changed except for the calibration of
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem-
perature as well as the hour counter, which is now
0178_436_en_2.02.fm
zero. The language is now English. Select anoth-
er language if this is required. Enter the values
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set
time and date.
Replacement of EPROM (program)
UNISAB II
The EPROMs are programmable modules,
mounted in sockets in the microelectronic part of
UNISAB II. Please note that there are two
EPROMs, numbered 0 and 1, identified by white
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
labels. If replacement is necessary, always re-
place both EPROMs as they belong together.
EPROM and electronics in general can be
damaged by static electricity. Therefore, make
sure that static electricity is discharged without
current passing through the electronics, ie
touch the part on which the EPROM is posi-
tioned both before and while picking up the
EPROM. Touch also the box of the device in
which EPROM is to be positioned both before
and while fitting the EPROM. It is of course
necessary to use the same hand that holds (or
is going to hold) the EPROM.
When replacing the EPROM or moving it from one
UNISAB II unit to another, do as follows:
• Note the value of the hour counter as well as
the calibration values for pressure transduc-
ers and brine temperature.
• Switch off the power supply to UNISAB II.
• Switch off the compressor motor starter and
observe all safety measures in accordance
with the instruction manual, local rules and
regulations.
• Place the door in service position as de-
scribed in Operating UNISAB II
• The EPROM modules are positioned in the
center of the printed circuit board (see
Fig. 11.1).
• Each EPROM module is loosened from its
socket by an authorized EPROM puller.
Take care not to damage the pins on the
EPROM module.
161/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service

Fig. 11.2 ues from the table in the Starting-up Manual,

Notch
EPROM
Mount the EPROMs manually while paying atten-
tion to the following:
• Make sure to position the EPROM labeled 0
in the upper socket, and the EPROM la-
beled 1 in the lower socket.
• Position the EPROM so that the notch in the
module is turning right (see Fig. 11.2).
• Take care that all pins are fitted in the socket
and carry out the mounting with great care.
• Refit the door.
When the above has been completed and the
control is switched on, the following picture will ap-
pear shortly in the display:
COPY EEPROM YES
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-
ured and the contents of the EEPROM, corre-
sponding to the compressor setup, will now be
copied into the CPU storeage.
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.
which is supplied with the compressor. Remem-
ber to set time and date.
When changing the EPROM in connection with an
upgrade to an updated program version, it is rec-
ommended to carry out a FACTORY RESET.
Before a FACTORY RESET is carried out, write
down all the UNISAB II settings in the table
UNISAB II settings, especially the parameters
which are changed back to factory setting by a
factory reset. This applies to the following param-
eters:
– Alarm and warning limits, set points,
PID parameters
– Timers, P band factors
– Capacity limits
See the table UNISAB II settings for a complete
review.
See section Operating UNISAB II control, Factory
settings for information on factory reset.
Once FACTORY RESET has been completed,
enter all the settings which are included in the ta-
ble UNISAB II settings, and which differ from the
UNISAB II factory values.
Replacement of serial EEPROM
(diagnosis)
This EEPROM includes information on:
e. Compressor serial no.
f. Date of initial start-up.
g. Compressor configuration.

The settting is now the same as before the h. Total number of alarm and warning limits and
EPROM was changed except for the calibration all other setting values.
of the pressure transducers, possibly the brine i. Status of up to 30 old alarms.
temperature as well as the hour counter, which is
j. Total number of alarms.
now zero. The language is now English. Select
another language if this is required. Enter the val-

162/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
The EEPROM (positioned in a socket) can be re-
moved from UNISAB II in compliance with the
same precautions as described under Replace-
ment of EPROM.
The EEPROM must usually remain in the control
as the control cannot function without the EEP-
ROM. However, in case the contents of the EEP-
ROM is to be examined by YORK Refrigeration,
Denmark, it can be removed for inspection. When
removing the EEPROM, switch off the control and
have an empty EEPROM ready for insertion.
Once the new EEPROM has been fitted, switch on
the control again. All information will now be cop-
ied into the new EEPROM.
The control is now ready for operation with the
same setup as before the EEPROM was re-
moved.
0178_436_en_2.02.fm
Replacement of battery
The battery is used primarily to ensure that the in-
ternal clock runs accurately after a power failure.
Moreover, the so-called RAM store is supplied
during power failures.
The battery has an expected service life of 10
years and is of the Lithium type. It is not reloaded
by the UNISAB II electronic circuit.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
If the following picture appears in the display after
a power failure, the battery should be replaced:
COPY EEPROM YES
If a new battery is available, switch off the control
and change the battery. Dispose of the old battery
in conformity with the environmental rules and
regulations in force.
Mount a new battery and switch on the control,
and the above picture will appear once more. An-
swer YES and press the H key.
The compressor setup is now the same as before
the power failure except for the calibration values
for the pressure transducers and the brine tem-
perature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. These values are included in the compres-
sor Starting-up Manual.
Remember to set time and date as well as lan-
guage. The compressor is now operational.
In case no new battery is available, answer YES
to the above picture and follow the procedure for
replacement of the EEPROM.
Please note that at the next power
failure, the problem will be the same.
163/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service

Installation of data communication These instructions only apply to the installation of

cable UNISAB II. For information on connection of
To obtain a correct function of the data communi- PROSAB II/ UNISAB II, see instr.no 0171-745 un-
cation between several YORK Refrigeration com- der Supplementary material.
puters, the communication cable must be con-
nected according to the following instructions.
Fig. 11.3

UNISAB II/UNISAB II

IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS BETWEEN UNISAB II,

RESISTANCE JUMPERS MUST BE CONNECTED IN EACH MODULE

UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II

- TX DL12 - TX DL12 - TX DL12
- RX DL13 - RX DL13 - RX DL13
63 64 65 66 63 64 65 66 63 64 65 66

termination block termination block

LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN

UNISAB II/PROSAB II

IN CASE OF CONNECTION BETWEEN MORE THAN TWO COMMUNICATION

MODULES, JUMPER(S) MUST BE CONNECTED IN BOTH END MODULES

PROSAB II PROSAB II
UNISAB II UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH
- TX DL12 S1 S1 S1
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
- RX DL13 MODULE MODULE
S2 S2 S2
63 64 65 66 + - + - + - + -

termination block

LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN

164/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service

Important! Fig. 11.4

The screen of the communication cable MUST be
connected correctly in the supplied screwed joints
(see Fig. 11.4). 1.
The cable is connected in the terminals shown in
Fig. 11.3. The cable must be pulled in parallel 2.
from control to control. This applies both to the two
conductors and the screen.
In the first and last control the cable must be fin-
ished correctly. The resistance of 120 ohm must 3.
be fitted as indicated (mounted on delivery). On all
other controls the resistance is removed and the
UNISAB II
terminals are used for passing on the communica-
tion cable. 4.
The total length of the cable between the controls
must not exceed 1,000 m. Cables of this type are
available from YORK Refrigeration.
0178_436_en_2.02.fm

UNISAB II

The cable must have the following 5.

data:
2-conductor data cable with screening
Pair capacity 85 pF/m
Fig. 11.4 shows the connection of the cable
screen in screwed joint.

0178-445 - ENG 165/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Grounding
UNISAB II must always be grounded to the com-
pressor frame. See drawing no. 2347-002 page
AC038_13 under Supplementary material.
In case of a shut down, there can be large electri-
cal potential on the compressor motor and thereby
on UNISAB II.
The data communication cable screen provides a
voltage equalisation between the UNISAB II units.
The above mentioned electrical potential may
166/222
cause a large current surge through the cable
screen. The screen may melt, causing the voltage
equalisation to be broken and the communication
to be hampered by noise.
To avoid this situation, it is strongly recommended
to provide an extra equalising wire in parallel with
the communication cable between all the units on
the network, as indicated in the drawing no.
2347-002 page AC040_10 under Supplementary
material.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation

12. MULTISAB regulation

Introduction MULTISAB is a distributed software module in-

MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control
system, which can capacity regulate reciprocating
and/or screw compressors according to rules,
which are set up in detail as described in the fol-
lowing, and in a sequence set by the user.
Fig. 12.1
cluded in all UNISAB II, PROSAB II and
UNISAB II units on delivery.
MULTISAB connects up to 14 compressors in one
and the same communication system.

1 2 3 14

UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II

The MULTISAB system is based on some basic the optimization of the compressors, it may be
rules: necessary to regulate the compressors externally.
The plant itself may also make special demands
0178_437_en.fm

1. The system is controlled and optimized ac-

cording to suction pressure, brine tempera-
ture, discharge pressure or external 4-20
mA signal, depending on the chosen type of
regulation.
2. The programmed starting sequence is al-
ways followed.
3. Screw compressors in operation are run to
as high a capacity as possible.
4. It is acceptable that reciprocating compres-
sors operate at part load.
MULTISAB is a regulating system for general ap-
plication. Should special demands be made as to
as to regulating speed and accuracy, which
makes a central external regulation necessary.
Such an alternative regulation can be carried out
in several ways:
• controlling the digital input External start
permission, normal stop
• using the digital output Auxiliary output
• using the 4-20 mA input Auxiliary input
• changing capacity set points from PC/PLC
via COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II.

0178-445 - ENG 167/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation

Fig. 12.2

PC/PLC

possible modem

COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II

1 2 3 14

UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II UNISAB II

In case compressor capacity is controlled through See section Installation of data communication
COMSAB II or PCCOMSAB II from a central com- cable as well as Connecting diagrams to
puter, be aware of the time delay through the com- find information on the physical linking of
munication system. UNISAB II units.
It is possible to make an approximate calculation B: All units must be configured for intercommu-
of this time delay. See COMSAB II instruction no nication. See also section Configuration.
0171-400. In SETUP I CONFIG a compressor number,
If UNISAB II is to be connected to controls of the COMPR. NO, beginning with no 1 and up-
UNISAB S/R or PROSAB II type, see the following wards, corresponding to the number of com-
instructions if the control units are part of the plant pressors must be entered in each unit.
in question: It is recommended to mark the compressors with
1) 0171-761 / UNISAB S-Control this number.
2) 0171-772 / UNISAB R-Control Important!
3) 0178-175 / UNISAB RT-Control If two compressors have the same com-
pressor number entered in UNISAB II, there
4) 0178-181 / UNISAB RTH-Control will be no communication between the units.
5) 0171-729 / PROSAB II In SETUP I CONFIG the communication speed,
6) 0171-743 / the MULTISAB system for BAUD RATE, must be entered. In case the
PROSAB/UNISAB II system only consists of UNISAB II units,
usually choose the highest baud rate. In
System setup case the system consists of both UNISAB II
and PROSAB II or UNISAB II units, choose
To be able to use MULTISAB, a number of points
1200 baud. Note that it must be checked
must be completed. Please find the checklist for
that all units on the network are able to run
MULTISAB setup (see the following pages). The
at the selected rate.
points on the checklist can be explained as fol-
lows: C: All units, especially screw compressors,
must have a swept volume value entered.
A: All units that are to be included in the system
must be connected physically.

168/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation
In SETUP I CONFIG enter SWEPT VOLUME,
which can be read on the compressor name
plate. See section Configuration.
D: An entry must be made in all units whether
the system contains a common evaporator
and a common condenser.
In SETUP I CONFIG enter the current combina-
tion of common evaporator and common
condenser in COMMON EVAP/COND. See
section Configuration.
E: All units must be have a system no and a
starting no.
In SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE
enter START NO and a SYSTEM NO. See
section MULTISAB.
F: All units in the same system must agree on
the way a regulating master (sys. regulator)
0178_437_en.fm
is chosen.
In SETUP I CONFIG select the same PREF.
MASTER in all UNISAB II units, COMPR#
or START#. See section Configuration.
If selecting COMPR#, the UNISAB II with the low-
est COMPR. NO (point B above) will always
be SYS.REGULATOR. The only exceptions
are if the UNISAB II is off power or discon-
nected from the network. In such case, the
UNISAB II with the next COMPR.NO will be
SYS.REGULATOR. Note that a defective
controlled input sensor does not lead to an
automatic change of SYS.REGULATOR in
this case.
If selecting START#, the UNISAB II with the low-
est START.NO (point F above) will be
SYS.REGULATOR for as long as the com-
pressor belonging to this UNISAB II unit is
running and ready. If the compressor is not
available, UNISAB II is not in REMOTE
mode, the controlled input sensor (point H
below) is defective, or UNISAB II is off pow-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
er or disconnected from the network, the
UNISAB II unit with the next START.NO will
be SYS. REGULATOR.
The SYS.REGULATOR is master of the co-ordi-
nated capacity control, which also means
that the controlled input sensor (point H be-
low) on this particular UNISAB II unit in use.
If only one compressor is required, it will
usually be the compressor of the SYS.REG-
ULATOR which is in operation. However, if
COMPR# is selected, it may very well be
another compressor.
Guidelines for selecting COMPR# or START#:
• COMPR# is easier and more safe if the con-
trolled input is not available to all UNISAB II
units.
• COMPR# must be selected if there are any
PROSAB II or UNISAB I units on the sys-
tem.
• START# is easier and more safe if equaliz-
ing running hours is important, especially if
all (or all but one) compressors must always
be available.
• Always make sure that COMPR.NO is a
fixed value, ie never change it to equalize
running hours! However, START.NO is
meant to be changed from time to time.
G: All units must be adjusted to remote control.
In SETUP I CONTROL COMPRESSOR.CTRL
MODE is on REMOTE. See section Com-
pressor regulation.
Regulation Setup
H: All units must be configured to the desired
regulating method.
In SETUP I CONFIG adjust CONTROL ON to
the desired regulating method. See section
Configuration.
169/222
UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation
The following four regulators are available. The
last two have both a cooling and a warming
function:
– Suction side
(regulation of suction pressure)
– Discharge side
(regulation of discharge pressure)
– Brine / hotwater
(regulation of brine/water temperatures)
– Ext. cooling / Ext. heating
(regulation of a user defined measuring
value: temp./pressure/level).
– Note that all units that can become mas-
ter must measure the same value to be
used for the capacity control. If eg Brine
/ Hotwater temperature control is select-
ed, a separate temperature sensor must
be available to all the relevant UNISAB II
units. Note that point F above describes
how to select the master.
I: All units must (usually) be configured to both
automatic start and automatic stop. If this is
not the case, the compressor will not start
up automatically in case cooling is required
or stop automatically when cooling is not re-
quired and the temperature becomes too
low.
In SETUP I CONFIG, choose:
AUTO START= YES
AUTO STOP= YES
See section Configuration.
J: The chosen regulator must be set in all
units.
In the picture for the parameter to be regulated,
set the following:
1) Regulator set point, SP1 and possibly SP2
170/222
2) Regulator neutral zone, NZ
3) Regulator proportional band, PB
See section Compressor regulation.
Regulation of the entire system will usually take
place on the basis of the regulator in the cur-
rent regulating master (sys. regulator), ie
the compressor with the lowest compressor
or starting number.
Therefore it is particularly important that the pa-
rameters of the configured regulator has
been set correctly.
Always set the same set point on all other units in
the same system (ie with the same SYS-
TEM NO).
K: All units must have their timers adjusted.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the fol-
lowing timers are set:
1) START DELAY, time delay before start.
2) STOP DELAY, time delay before stop.
See section Timers, Timer setup.
Both timers can be made to work proportionally (ie
depending on the size of Pb).
In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND
FACTOR a proportional factor can be set for
each of the timers.
This means that if only a small difference exists
between the desired temperature (Sp) and
the current one, the timer in the time delays
will count very slowly (up to
10 times slower than the time set, depend-
ing on the factor set).
If the difference between the desired temperature
and the current one is considerable (outside
the P Band), the timer in the time delay will
count in seconds.
See sectionTimers, P Band factor.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation
In case of reciprocating compressors, another two
timers must be set.
3) DELAY UP, time delay during loading of
stages.
4) DELAY DOWN, time delay during unloading
of stages.
Both of these timers can also be made to work
proportionally (ie depending on the size of
Pb).
In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR a pro-
portional factor can be set for each of the
timers.
L: In plants with a combination of screw and
reciprocating compressors a number of fac-
tors may be set to optimize compressor op-
eration so that the two types of compressors
are used in the best way possible. These
0178_437_en.fm
factors can only be set on reciprocating
compressors and will be effective only in
case all reciprocating compressors have
lower starting numbers than the screw com-
pressors in the same system, and only if
TAKE OVER is set to YES in SETUP I
CONFIG, See section Configuration.
The optimization is carried out by the Trans-
fer function and the Take-over function.
It is not economical to run a screw compres-
sor at low capacity. The Transfer function
attempts to avoid this by reducing the ca-
pacity of the reciprocating compressor(s), ie
by transferring load to the screw compres-
sor. The Take-over function increases the
capacity of the reciprocating compressor(s)
to make the screw compressor stop, ie by
taking over load from the screw compres-
sor.
In the section Example of regulation - a
combination of screw and reciprocating
compressors illustrative examples of the
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Transfer and the Take-over situations are
included.
As described below, several parameters are
available to adjust the Transfer and the
Take-over function.
In SETUP ITIMERS I TRANSFER a pro-
portional factor FACTOR DOWN (1-10, de-
fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY DOWN.
It is used when MULTISAB wants to let a re-
ciprocating compressor decrease its capac-
ity in favour of a screw compressor at low
capacity. A larger FACTOR DOWN makes
MULTISAB wait longer before reducing the
reciprocating compressor capacity another
stage.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TRANSFER the
size of a transfer zone ZONE can be set, ie
the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
default 15%) where transfer may take place.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
proportional factor FACTOR UP (1-10, de-
fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY UP. It is
used when MULTISAB wants to increase
the capacity of the reciprocating compres-
sor to force the screw compressor down be-
low 5% capacity, making it stop. A larger
FACTOR UP makes MULTISAB wait longer
before increasing the reciprocating com-
pressor capacity another stage.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
proportional factor FACTOR START (1-10,
default 1) can be set for the START DELAY
timer. It is used when MULTISAB wants to
start a reciprocating compressor to take
over the operation from a screw compressor
which is running at low capacity.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER the
size of a take-over zone ZONE can be set,
ie the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
171/222
UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation
default 15%) where take-over may take
place.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the
following timers are found.
1) TAKE-OVER DELAY, time delay at
take-over, fixed at 300 seconds. When a re-
ciprocating compressor has calculated that
it is possible to take over a subsequent
screw compressor, it will pass into a
take-over mode and start TAKE-OVER DE-
LAY. If the reciprocating compressor during
the entire count down of take-over delay can
continue to take over, thus staying in the
take-over mode, START DELAY will be ac-
172/222
tivated once TAKE-OVER DELAY
expires.
2) TAKE-OVER MAX, max duration of a
take-over attempt. When TAKE-OVER DE-
LAY expires, the time delay TAKE-OVER
MAX will also be activated to ensure that a
reciprocating compressor will not use more
than the TAKE-OVER MAX time during a
take-over attempt. If the screw compressor
has not stopped before the TAKE-OVER
MAX expires, the reciprocating compressor
will give up and stop. This delay function
can be cancelled by setting the delay for 0
(default).
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist

13. Checklist
Compressor No
Checklist for MULTISAB setup
No Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A Cabling All co-operating UNISAB
units must be wired to-
gether on common net-
work.
B.1 CONFIG→ Unique ID for each com-
COMPR NO pressor on network
B.2 CONFIG → Identical for all units on
BAUD RATE network
C CONFIG → Must be entered correctly
SWEPT for each compressor, at
VOLUME least for screws
D CONFIG→ Identical for all compres-
COMMON sors within system
EVAP/COND
E.1 MULTISAB Unique priority within sys-
STATE → tem (SYSTEM NO)
START NO
0178_438_en.fm

E.2 MULTISAB System ID, identical for all

STATE → compressors on same
SYSTEM NO controlled input
CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
REFRIGERANT sors within system
F CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
PREF. MASTER sors within system
G CONTROL → Must be REMOTE unless
COMPR. the compressor is exclud-
CONTROL ed (temporarily) from
MULTISAB
H.1 CONFIG → Identical for all compres-
CONTROL ON sors within system - see
also item C
H.2 Controlled input The measurement must
sencor be available to all com-
pressors in the system
which can become mas-
ter
I.1 CONFIG → Should usually be YES. If
AUTO START not, the compressor must
be started manually
I.2 CONFIG → Should usually be YES. If
AUTO STOP not, the compressor must
be stopped manually

0178-445 - ENG 173/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist

Compressor No
Checklist for MULTISAB setup
No Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J.1 Set point Identical for all compres-
sors within system
J.2 Neutral zone Matching values for all
and compressors within sys-
tem
P Band
K.1 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all
→ START DE- compressors within sys-
LAY tem
K.1 P BAND FAC- Matching values for all
a TOR → compressors within sys-
START DELAY tem
K.2 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all
→ STOP DE- compressors within sys-
LAY tem
K.2 P BAND FAC- Matching values for all
a TOR → compressors within sys-
STOP DELAY tem
K.3 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ DELAY UP ciprocating compressors
within system
K.3 P BAND FAC- Matching values for all re-
a TOR → ciprocating compressors
DELAY UP within system
K.4 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ DELAY ciprocating compressors
DOWN within system
K.4 P BAND FAC- Matching values for all re-
a TOR → ciprocating compressors
DELAY DOWN within system
L.1 CONFIG → Only recipr. compr. Set
TAKE OVER for YES if compr. is to
take over from screw
L.2 TIMER SETUP Matching values for all re-
→ TK OVER ciprocating compressors
MAX within system (TK = Take)
L.3 TRANSFER → Matching values for all re-
FACTOR ciprocating compressors
DOWN within system
L.4 TRANSFER → Matching values for all re-
ZONE ciprocating compressors
within system
L.5 TAKE-OVER → Matching values for all re-
FACTOR UP ciprocating compressors
within system

174/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist

Compressor No
Checklist for MULTISAB setup
No Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L.6 TAKE-OVER → Matching values for all re-
FACTOR ciprocating compressors
START within system
L.7 TAKE-OVER → Matching values for all re-
ZONE ciprocating compressors
within system
0178_438_en.fm

0178-445 - ENG 175/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist

176/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

14. Start and system numbers

- pref. master = COMPR#.

Example A - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4 5

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

Example B - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 5 4 3 2 1

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

In examples A and B, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system.

Example C - plants with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants) where
pref. master = COMPR#.
0178_439_en.fm

System no 1 1 2 2 2

Starting no 2 1 3 1 2

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

In example C, K1 will be system regulator of system no 1, and K3 will be system regulator of system no 2.

SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE
shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG-
ULATOR.
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the
compressor with the lowest number in the individ-
ual system that works as system regulator.
A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB
system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO,
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs
EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX-
TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not
been connected.

The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR) Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the
will regulate the other compressors in the system MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re-
even if the compressor is in MANUAL, AUTO, mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN. or communication signal.

Only if the voltage supply or the communication is
disconnected, the system will automatically select
a new system regulator, which will be the unit with
the second lowest number.
The way the system operates can be varied de-
pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw
compressor comes first in the sequence. Like-
wise, the way the system operates can be varied
with screw compressors of different sizes, de-

0178-445 - ENG 177/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

pending on whether a small or large compressor
comes first.
If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor-
tunate part load conditions may occur, depending
on the sequence.
Be aware that if a screw compressor has the low-
est starting number, it may go down on low capac-
ity even at small loads.
In case of mixed systems, it is recommended that
all reciprocating compressors in a system is
placed one after the other, followed by the screw
compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
transfer functions will only be effective in case all
of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-
ing numbers than the screw compressors in the
same system.

Start and system numbers - pref. master = START#

Example A - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4 5

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

In example A, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K1 is stopped because of an alarm or if one of the digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP
or EXTERNAL START- IMMEDIATE STOP is disconnected - and a cooling requirement still exists, the
next compressor in the starting sequence will be the regulator of the entire system provided that it is op-
erating or able to start - and that it does start. In the above example K2 will become the regulator.
Example B - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 5 4 3 2 1

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

In example B, K5 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K5 is stopped - and a cooling requirement still exists, the next compressor in the starting sequence will
become the regulator of the entire system provided that it is operating or able to start - and that it does
start. In the above example K4 will become the regulator.
Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)

System no 1 1 2 2 2

178/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)
Start no 2 1
Compressor no K1 K2
In example C, K2 will be the system regulator of system no 1, and K4 will be the system regulator of sys-
tem no 2 provided that K2 and K4 are operating or able to start.
SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE
shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG-
ULATOR.
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the
compressor with the lowest number in the individ-
ual system that works as system regulator.
The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR)
will regulate the other compressors in the system,
but only if the compressor is in REMOTE/MULTI-
SAB and at the same time operating or ready to
start.
0178_439_en.fm
A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB
system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO,
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs
EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX-
TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not
been connected.
Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the
MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re-
mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal
or communication signal.
The way the system operates can be varied de-
pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw
compressor is comes first in the sequence. Like-
wise, the way the system operates can be varied
with screw compressors of different sizes, de-
pending on whether a small or large compressor
comes first.
Compressor K1. SAB163 Mk.2 K2. SAB163 Mk.2
System no 1 1
Starting no 1 2
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
3 1 2
K3 K4 K5
If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor-
tunate part load conditions may occur, depending
on the sequence.
Be aware that if a screw compressor has the low-
est starting number, it may go down on low capac-
ity even at small loads.
In case of mixed systems it is recommended that
all reciprocating compressors in a system be
placed one after the other, followed by the screw
compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
transfer functions will only be effective in case all
of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-
ing numbers than the screw compressors in the
same system.
Note:
The described example of possible configuration
where the pref.master = START# can only be
used for plants (systems) which are fitted solely
with UNISAB II units. The function cannot be used
together with a PROSAB II, UNISAB S or UNISAB
R / RT/ RTH. In such cases set pref.master =
COMPR# on UNISAB II.
Example of regulation - screw
compressors only
The working of MULTISAB will be described on
the basis of the below example and with the indi-
cated compressors.
K3. SAB202S K4. SAB202S
1 1
3 4
179/222
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

The following settings have been made in all units: sors. By increasing Nz the temperature can vary
The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL within a larger area before a temperature regula-
STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE tion becomes necessary.
STOP have been connected. If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
changes in temperature to return to its set point.
Configuration This usually leads to temperature variations close
CONTROL ON = BRINE to the set point, but with frequent loading/unload-
ing of compressor capacity.
AUTO START = YES
If Pb is increasedl the plant reaction will be slower,
AUTO STOP = YES
and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
COMPR.NO = xx the set point.
(the compressors are numbered from 1-4)
START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
PREF. MASTER = COMPR# start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
(ie K1 is the system regulator) compressor runs above 95% capacity and the
COMMON EVAP/COND =Y/Y ( temperature is above the set point, START DE-
(common evaporator and common condenser) LAY will be started on the next compressor in the
sequence. Should the temperature reach the set
SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx
point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
(corresponding to compressor name plate)
DELAY expires, the following compressor will not
BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400 start.
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)
Should the temperature rise excessively before
start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
Regulating parameters (for BRINE be reduced.
regulator)
In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,
SP = -2°C
START DELAY must be increased.
(chosen according to the operating conditions of
the plant) STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-
sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If quick
NZ = 1°C
stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the com-
PB = 5°C pressor is to run for a longer period, increase
STOP DELAY.
Timers The above is a general description of the various
START DELAY = 60 sec. setting potentials. The final settings will depend
STOP DELAY = 45 sec. completely on the plant in question.

During the running-in time, adjustment of the val-

ues will be required. Loading sequence
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor tem- Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
perature variations in relation to the set point. This eg 70 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
will result in a frequent regulation of the compres- K4 {Not my turn} are stopped.

180/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
The MULTISAB status, shown in picture SETUP
I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is marked
with {--}.
At increasing cooling requirements and conse-
quent capacity loading, compressor K1 will in-
crease capacity until 100% capacity is reached.
The loading speed depends on how far the imme-
diate temperature is above the set point that has
been entered into the regulator.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-
ate temperature is above the set point and the ca-
pacity of K1 is above 95%, the time delay (START
DELAY) will start up in UNISAB II on compressor
K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
zero, and compressor K2 will start. (Should the
temperature reach the set point, ie be within Nz
before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).
0178_439_en.fm
When the above has taken place, screw compres-
sor K1 {Lead compr.} will run slowly down from
100% while K2 will increase its capacity {Lag com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
pr.}. When the compressors meet, ie when their
slide position is the same, they will continue to
regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).
How much screw compressor K1 decreases in ca-
pacity and how fast in order to meet K2 depends
completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating
signal.
With screw compressors K1 and K2 at 100% and
with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-
LAY will be started on screw compressor K3. After
a count-down to zero, K3 will start up. K1 will be
kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K2 and
K3 will regulate in parallel.
With a persistent cooling requirement and with K1,
K2 and K3 at 100%, START DELAY will be started
on screw compressor K4. The timer will count
down to zero, and K4 will start up. K1 and K2 will
be kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K3
and K4 will regulate in parallel.
181/222
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

Fig. 14.1

% Lead

100
Lead=lag
75

Increasing capacity 50
Lag

25
Start
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 min.

%
100

Lead
75

Decreasing capacity 50
Lag

25
Stop
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 min.

When two screw compressors regulate in parallel,
it means that they follow each other up and down
in capacity and that both units will try to keep the
same capacity +/- approx 2%.
If the two compressors that regulate in parallel
have equal capacities, the capacity change at any
given relocation of the capacity slide will be dou-
bled compared to the regulation of a single com-
pressor.
MULTISAB compensates for this by reducing (by
half) the up and down regulating speed.
Unloading sequence
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed
to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max ca-
pacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.}
both in parallel operation at eg 90%.
At decreasing cooling requirement and a conse-
quent capacity unloading, compressors K2 and
K3 will decrease their capacity until both are be-
low the value called parallel capacity. The parallel
capacity is automatically calculated by MULTI-
SAB. It depends on the size and types of the in-
volved compressors and the operating conditions.
The parallel capacity is the limit at which K2 is
able to take over for certain. If the two compres-
sors are of equal size, the parallel capacity will
usually be about 55%.
The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
CONTROL.
K3 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
Down} with a speed of approx 12%/min. When K3
is below 5% {May stop} the STOP DELAY timer
will start up. When STOP DELAY expires, K3 will
stop {Blocked}. K2 will, until K3 stops, ensure reg-

182/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

ulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up}, as K1 remains
at 100% {Runs at max capacity}.
Screw compressor K1 {Lead compr.} and K2 {Lag
compr.} will join each other in parallel operation.
If a cooling requirements still does not exist, K1
and K2 will decrease their capacity until both are
below parallel capacity. K2 will ramp down and
stop as soon as the STOP DELAY timer expires.
K1 will now ensure regulation all alone {Runs by
itself}.
Operating sequence
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed
to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max. ca-
pacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.}
both in parallel operation at eg 80%.
The cooling requirement is constant.
0178_439_en.fm
When K1 and K3 are above 95% the time delay
(START DELAY) will start in UNISAB II
on compressor K4. The timer will count down from
its set point to zero, and compressor K4 will start
up.
K4 will regulate upwards and the plant will have
the following operating mode: K1 at 100 % {Runs
at max capacity}, K3 {Lead compr.} and K4 {Lag
compr.} both in parallel operation at approx 65%
(the parallel operation percentage is lower now
than during the output state as K4 is larger than
K2).
The alarm on K2 is confirmed (after the oil filter
has been replaced), and although K2 enters the
READY status {Not my turn}, it will not start until a
requirement exists, as MULTISAB does not stop
K4 to make K2 resume its position in the se-
quence.

Due to an alarm caused by high oil filter differen- Example of regulation -

tial pressure, K2 stops {Blocked}. This makes K1 reciprocating compressors only
{Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.} change to par- The working of MULTISAB will be described on
allel operation, and K3 will increase its capacity to the basis of the below example and with the indi-
100%. cated compressors.

Compressor K1. SMC108L K2. SMC108L K3. SMC106S K4. SMC106S

System no 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4

The following settings have been made in all units: COMPR.NO = xx

The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL (The compressorers are numbered from 1-4)
STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE PREF. MASTER = COMPR#
STOP have been connected. (ie K1 is the system regulator)
COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y
Configuration (common evaporator and common condenser)
CONTROL ON = SUCTION
SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx
AUTO START = YES (corresponding to the compressor name plate)
AUTO STOP = YES BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)

0178-445 - ENG 183/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION quence. Should the temperature reach the set
PRESSURE regulator) point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
SP = -10°C/R DELAY expires, the next compressor will not start.
(chosen according to the operating conditions of Should the temperature rise excessively before
the plant) start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
NZ = 3°C be reduced.

PB = 5°C In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,

START DELAY must be increased.

Timers STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-

sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
START DELAY = 60 sec
quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
STOP DELAY = 45 sec the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-
DELAY UP = 30 sec crease STOP DELAY.

DELAY DOWN = 20 sec If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-

During the running-in time, adjustment of the val-
ues will be required.
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc-
tion pressure variations in relation to the set point.
This will result in frequent regulation of the com-
pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure
can vary within a larger area before a regulation of
the compressors becomes necessary.
If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
point. This usually leads to temperature variations
close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-
ing of compressor capacity.
If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
the set point.
START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
compressor runs at 100% capacity and the tem-
perature is above the set point, START DELAY
will be started on the next compressor in the se-
pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
in faster loading.
If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
will result in faster unloading.
In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is
higher than DELAY DOWN.
The above is a general description of the various
setting. The final settings will depend completely
on the plant in question.
Loading sequence
Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
eg 75 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
K4 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
marked with {--}.

184/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

Fig. 14.2
Capacity for
1 compressor
% Increasing requirement for capacity

Compressor 1 Compressors 1+2

100
Compressor 2
75

50

25

Time
Capacity for
1 compressor
%
Decreasing requirement for capacity

Compressors 1+2
100
Compressor 2 Compressors 1
75
50

25
0178_439_en.fm

Time

At increasing cooling requirement and conse-
quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor
K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until
100% capacity has been reached.
It is possible to make the loading speed depend
on how far the actual suction pressure is above
the set point by setting the proportional factor DE-
LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set-
up.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-
ate suction pressure is higher that the set point,
the timer START DELAY is started on compressor
K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
zero, and K2 will start. (In case the suction pres-
sure reaches the neutral zone before START DE-
LAY expires, K2 will not start).
With compressor K2 at 100% and still capacity re-
quirement, the timer START DELAY starts on
compressor K3. It will count down before K3 starts
up.
When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement
still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on
K4. When timer has expired, K4 will start.
Unloading sequence
In an operating situation where the entire plant
runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re-
quirement, unloading will start on compressor K4
first.
K4 will decrease its capacity by unloading stages
with the time delay DELAY DOWN between each
change of stage until it reaches minimum capaci-
ty, ie 33% (SMC 106S). One stage will now be un-

0178-445 - ENG 185/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

loaded on compressor K3, which will run at 67%,
and the timer STOP DELAY will start on K4, (dur-
ing unloading the reciprocating compressors will
overlap, Fig. 14.2).
When time delay STOP DELAY expires on K4, K4
will stop.
K3 will now decrease its capacity to minimum, and
after K2 has unloaded one stage, K3 will stop on
the timer STOP DELAY.
Reciprocating compressor K2 will now start un-
loading stages with time delay DELAY DOWN,
until it reaches minimum capacity, ie 25%. One
stage will be unloaded on compressor K1, and the
timer STOP DELAY will start on K2.
A:
Compressor K1. Recip. K2. Recip.
The system will continue its unloading in stages
until K1 is stopped.
It is also possible that the plant stabilizes at part
load, and if the cooling requirement increases, the
situation will be the same as described under
Loading sequence.
Example of regulation - combination of
screw and reciprocating compressors
The working of MULTISAB will be described on
the basis of the below examples A and B and with
the indicated compressors.
K3. Screw K4. Screw K5. Screw

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4 5

B:
Compressor K1. Screw K2. Screw K3. Screw K4. Recip. K5.Recip.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4 5

The following settings have been made in all units: COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y
The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL (common evaporator and common condenser)
STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx
STOP have been connected. (corresponding to the compressor name plate)
BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400
Configuration (all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)
CONTROL ON = SUCTION
AUTO START = YES Regulating parameters (for SUCTION
AUTO STOP = YES PRESSURE regulator)
COMPR.NO = xx SP = -20°C/R
(The compressorers are numbered from 1-5) (chosen according to the operating conditions of
the plant)
PREF. MASTER = COMPR#
(ie K1 is the system regulator) NZ = 1°C

186/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
PB = 5°C
Timers
START DELAY = 60 sec
STOP DELAY = 45 sec
DELAY UP = 30 sec
(only reciprocating compressors)
DELAY DOWN = 20 sec
(only reciprocating compressors)
During the running-in time, adjustment of the val-
ues will be required.
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc-
tion pressure variations in relation to the set point.
This will result in frequent regulation of the com-
pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure
can vary within a larger area before a regulation of
the compressors becomes necessary.
0178_439_en.fm
If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
point. This usually leads to temperature variations
close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-
ing of compressor capacity.
If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
and this may prevent frequent oscillations around
the set point.
The purpose of START DELAY is to try to prevent
inadvertent start-up of a subsequent compressor.
In case a compressor is at 100% capacity and the
suction pressure is still above the neutral zone,
START DELAY will be started on the next com-
pressor in the sequence. Should the suction pres-
sure reach the neutral zone before START DE-
LAY expires, the following compressor will not
start.
Should the temperature rise excessively before
start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
be reduced.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,
START DELAY must be increased.
STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-
sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-
crease STOP DELAY.
If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-
pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
in faster loading.
If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
will result in faster unloading.
In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is
higher than DELAY DOWN.
It is recommended to place all reciprocating com-
pressors in a system one after the other followed
by the screw compressors, or vice versa.
The take-over and transfer functions described in
the following will only be effective if all reciprocat-
ing compressors have lower starting numbers
than the screw compressors.
The above is a general description of the various
settings. The final settings will depend completely
on the plant in question.
Loading sequence - sequence A
Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at
eg 50 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3, K4
and K5 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
marked with {--}.
At increasing cooling requirement and conse-
quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor
187/222
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until
100% capacity has been reached.
It is possible to make the loading speed depend
on how far the actual suction pressure is above
the set point by setting the proportional factor DE-
LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set-
up.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the actual
suction pressure is higher than the set point, the
timer START DELAY will start on compressor K2.
The timer will count down from its set point to ze-
ro, and reciprocating compressor K2 will start. (In
case the suction pressure reaches the neutral
zone before START DELAY expires, K2 will not
start).
With compressor K2 at 100% and a persistent ca-
pacity requirement, the timer START DELAY will
start on K3. The timer will count down before K3
starts up.
When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement
still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on
K4. When the timer has expired, K4 will start.
When the above has taken place, screw compres-
sor K3 will go down from 100% while K4 will in-
crease its capacity. When they meet, ie when their
slide positions are the same, they will continue to
regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).
Whether screw compressor K3 decreases its ca-
pacity and how fast to meet K4 depends com-
pletely on the strength of the "UP" regulating sig-
nal.
With screw compressors K3 and K4 at 100% and
with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-
LAY will be started on screw compressor K5. After
a countdown to zero, K5 will start up. K3 will now
be kept at 100% {Runs at max capacity}, and K4
{Lead compr.} and K5 {Lag compr.} will regulate in
parallel.
188/222
State of transfer
In case of a minor cooling requirement, it is as-
sumed that the plant stabilizes in the following sit-
uation: reciprocating compressors K1 and K2 both
at 100% and screw compressor K3 in 40% slide
position.
Reciprocating compressor K2 will now pass into
the "transfer" state, ie it will start decreasing its ca-
pacity to force the screw compressor capacity up-
wards.
However, this will only take place if the actual suc-
tion pressure is within the 'transfer zone', consist-
ing of the neutral zone (zone 1) plus the transfer
zone (zone 3), which is default 15% of the regula-
tor proportional band, (see Fig. 14.3).
When the reciprocating compressor unloads an-
other stage, this will happen with a time delay that
(in sec) is the setting of DELAY DOWN multiplied
by the 'transfer factor' for DELAY DOWN. This
factor, 1-10, has been entered to avoid hunting in
the plant as far as possible as the regulating sys-
tem must have time to react to the rise in the suc-
tion pressure when the reciprocating compressor
is unloading.
If the suction pressure rises (zone 2), the recipro-
cating compressor will stop the down regulation
while the screw compressor regulates upwards to
get the suction pressure in place.
Once the plant has balanced, the reciprocating
compressor will continue the unloading of stages
and the screw compressor will readjust.
Provided that requirements stay the same, this
process will continue until the screw compressor
is above 85% slide posiiton. Above this fixed limit
it is assumed that the screw compressor is run-
ning fairly economically. Further reduction of the
reciprocating compressor capacity would result in
a high risk that the screw compressor is no longer
able to take over, causing frequent loading and
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

unloading of stages or start and stop of the recip- If the cooling requirement increases, screw com-
rocating compressor. pressor K3 will be loaded at 100%, whereupon re-
The result may be that the reciprocating compre- ciprocating compressor K2 will be loaded.
sor K1 runs at 100%, K2 at 25% and screw com-
pressor K3 at 85%.
Fig. 14.3

+ regulator output signal (capacity UP)

6. outside PB

4. 85% PB

2. 15% PB
1. NZ Takeover zone = 1+2
SP
Transfer zone = 1+3
3. 15% PB

5. 85% PB
0178_439_en.fm

7. outside PB

- regulator output signal (capacity DOWN)

State of take-over compensated for by unloading on screw compres-

If the plant stabilizes after a transfer situation with
K1 at 100%, K2 stopped, screw compressor K3 at
40% capacity, and K2 able to take over this ca-
pacity, K2 will start. However, this will only take
place if the actual suction pressure is within the
'take-over zones', consisting of the neutral zone
(zone 1) plus the take-over zone (zone 2) which is
default 15% of the regulator proportional band,
(see Fig. 14.3).
When K2 starts up to take over the screw com-
pressor capacity, this will take place with the load-
ing time DELAY UP multiplied by the 'take-over'
factor for DELAY UP. This factor, 1-10, has been
entered to avoid hunting.
When reciprocating compressor K2 is loading
stages, the suction pressure will drop, but this is
sor K3, until it reaches minimum and stops on
STOP DELAY.
Be aware that during reloading periods it may
happen that a screw compressor is running at low
capacity. Furthermore, reloading will take a cer-
tain amount of time, which prevents instability in
the plant.
In plants with frequent load changes, it may take
longer before the reciprocating compressors take
over/transfer capacity.
If the plant is very unstable, the variations may be
absorbed exclusively by the screw compressor.
Consequently, the screw compressor will in some
periods run at low capacity. This can be avoided
by removing the starting permission from either

0178-445 - ENG 189/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
the screw compressor or the reciprocating com-
pressor.
Reciprocating compressors will only try to take
over/transfer capacity from/to screw compressors
that come later in the sequence.
Unloading sequence - sequence A
In an operating situation where the entire plant
runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re-
quirement, unloading will start on the screw com-
pressors.
As illustrated in Fig. 14.1, K4 and K5 will reduce
their capacity in parallel until both are below the
value called the parallel capacity. The parallel ca-
pacity is automatically calculated by MULTISAB.
It depends on the size and types of the involved
compressors and the operating conditions. The
parallel capacity is the limit at which it is certain
that K4 is able to take over. If the two compressors
are of equal size, the parallel capacity will usually
be approx 55%.
The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
CONTROL.
K5 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
Down} with a speed of approx 12% /min. When K5
is below 5% {May stop}, the timer STOP DELAY
will start. When STOP DELAY expires, K5 will
stop {Blocked}. K4 will, until K5 stops, ensure reg-
ulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up} as K1, K2 and
K3 remain at 100% {Runs at max capacity}.
Next, the screw compressors K3 {Lead compr.}
and K4 {Lag compr.} will work together until K4
stops.
K3 will now decrease its capacity to a minimum
and stops on its time, STOP DELAY.
When this has happened reciprocating compres-
sor K2 will start unloading stages with the time de-
190/222
lay DELAY DOWN until it is down to minimum ca-
pacity. Next, a stage is unloaded on compressor
K1, and the STOP DELAY time will start on K2 (ie
during unloading the reciprocating compressors
will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2).
The system will continue unloading in stages until
K1 stops.
The plant may also stabilize at part load, and in
case the cooling requirement is increasing, the sit-
uation will be the same as described under Load-
ing sequence - sequence A.
Loading sequence - sequence B
Compressor K1 is assumed to have stopped {May
start}, K2, K3, K4 and K5 {Not my turn} are
stopped.
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-
UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
marked with {--}.
In case of a cooling requirement, K1 will start.
When it has reached 100% capacity, START DE-
LAY will start on screw compressor K2. The timer
will count down, and K2 will start up. When this
has happened, screw compressor K1 will go down
from 100%, while the capacity of K2 will go up.
When the compressors meet, ie when their slide
positions are the same, they will regulate in paral-
lel.
When K1 and K2 are in 100%, the time delay
START DELAY will start on screw compressor K3.
When the timer has expired, K3 will start up and
K1 will be kept at 100%.
When this has happened, screw compressor K2
will go down from 100%, while the capacity of K3
will go up. When the compressors meet, ie when
their slide positions are the same, they will regu-
late in parallel.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
Whether K2 reduces its capacity and at which
speed to meet K3 depends completely on the
strength of the "UP" regulating signal.
With K2 and K3 at 100% and a persistent cooling
requirement, ie the actual suction pressure is
higher than the set point, the time delay START
DELAY will start on reciprocating compressor K4.
The timer will count down to zero and reciprocat-
ing compressor K4 will start up. Should the actual
suction pressure reach the neutral zone before
START DELAY expires, K4 will not start.
K4 will now load and unload stages according to
the cooling requirements, while the screw com-
pressors K1, K2, K3 are kept at 100% capacity
{Runs at max capacity}.
This will continue until all the compressors are at
100% capacity.
0178_439_en.fm
Be aware that with the above sequence screw
compressor K1 may start and stabilize at eg 35%
capacity corresponding to the actual cooling re-
quirement. In this situation a subsequent recipro-
cating compressor will not try to take over be-
cause it comes later in the sequence.
Unloading sequence - sequence B
With the entire plant running at 100% and a de-
creasing cooling requirement, reciprocating com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
pressor K5 {Lag compr.} will be the first to unload
stages with time delay DELAY DOWN until it has
reached minimum capacity. Next, one stage is un-
loaded on compressor K4, and STOP DELAY will
now start on K5 (ie during unloading the recipro-
cating compressors will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2)).
When STOP DELAY has expired, compressor K5
will stop, and K4 will now continue the unloading.
When K4 has unloaded to minimum capacity, it
will start up its STOP DELAY time and when this
has expired, K4 will stop.
Screw compressors K2 and K3 are now going to
decrease their capacity in parallel operation, until
they are below the parallel capacity (usually 55%
if they are of equal size). K3 will be run down to
minimum capacity and stops on its STOP DELAY
time. At the same time K2 will take over.
Screw compressors K1 and K2 will adjust in par-
allel to the same slide position and start decreas-
ing their capacity in parallel operation until they
are below the parallel capacity. K2 will be run
down to minimum capacity and stop on its STOP
DELAY time. At the same time K1 will take over.
Depending on the capacity requirement, K1 will
reduce its capacity and possibly stop completely.
191/222
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

Practical example 1
Fig. 14.4

% SMC 8-100 Start # 2

100
80
60
40
20
0
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-2 Start # 3
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 Immediate Time

A B C D E F G H I K

0177150_0

Fig. 14.4 shows that the VMY 347 screw com-
pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres-
sors have numbers 2 and 3. Further, SMC 12-100
has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. The se-
quence starting number is seen after "Start #".
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes
a regulating course over a period of approx 3
hours, divided into intervals from A to K.
In interval "A" compressors 1 and 2 run at part
load, until they are both a little below 50% slide
position, interval "B". Here, the system decides
that K1 can be unloaded and K2 will take over.
K2 will now increase its capacity with a simultane-
ous increase in the cooling requirement, which
means that K4 will start up and adjust its capacity,
interval "C". In interval "D" the cooling requirement
drops, and K2 will unload and stop. The two recip-
rocating compressors K4 and K5 will now cover
the cooling requirements.
In interval "E" there is a brief increase in the cool-
ing requirement. This increase is covered by K2.
After some time K2 will stop as the cooling re-
quirement has dropped again. However, the plant
does not have time to stabilize.
In interval "F" the cooling requirement rises again
and K2 will restart and go up to approx 60% slide
position. Here, the plant stabilizes at a constant
compressor capacity in interval "G".
In the period until interval "H" the reciprocating
compressor transfers capacity to the screw com-

192/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

pressor as the screw compressor is below 85% risen to 70%. Until interval "K" K4 will unload fur-
slide position. K5 stops completely, and K4 will ther and K2 will now be at 100% capacity.
start transferring capacity. In interval "I" K2 has

Practical example 2
Fig. 14.5

%
SMC 8-100 Start # 2
100
80
60
40
20
0
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
100
80
60
40
20
0
0178_439_en.fm

VMY 325-2 Start # 3

100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 Immediate
Time
A B C D E F G H I K
0177150_0

Fig. 14.5 shows that the VMY 347 screw com-
pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres-
sors have numbers 2 and 3. Furthermore, SMC
12-100 has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5.
The sequence starting number is seen after "Start
#".
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes
a regulating course over a period of approx. 3
hours, divided into intervals from A to K.
In interval "A" compressors K2 and K4 are running
at 100% until interval "B". Here, there is a rise in
the cooling requirement, and K5 will start loading.
Until interval "C" these three compressors are run-
ning at 100%. A rise in the cooling requirement will
make K1 start up. At this point K1 and K2 will start
dividing the capacity. This can be seen in interval
"D", where K2 has decreased a little, while K1 is
on its way up.
In interval "E" K1 and K2 have the same slide po-
sition (approx 70%) and they regulate in parallel.
In interval "F" K5 may transfer capacity and this
may continue with K4 transferring until interval
"G", where the screw compressors have reached
approx 80%.

0178-445 - ENG 193/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers
In interval "H" K1 and K2 are above 85% and K4
will stay passive until interval "I", where K1 and K2
have regulated down due to decreasing cooling
requirement. Once they are below 85%, K4 will
transfer its remaining capacity. The screw com-
pressors have now taken over the entire load.
Please note that in case the sequence is changed
during operation, do not expect any immediate re-
action. If the plant is balanced at this particular
time, it will continue to operate with the "old" se-
quence, until a movement has taken place in the
regulation and it has adapted to the new se-
quence. The chosen compressor sequence will
depend on the operating mode of the plant as well
as the size of the compressors compared to each
other.
Thus, it can be difficult to achieve an optimum
compressor operation in every situation. Howev-
er, it is possible to select compressors by using
the signal input external start - normal stop as a
supplement to the MULTISAB system facilities as
described above. By removing the external start -
normal start signal the compressors can be re-
moved from the sequence. MULTISAB will now
load compressors with rising sequence numbers -
despite the "holes" in the starting sequence.
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start
1) Are all UNISAB II units set on REMOTE?
2) Have the signals external start - normal stop
and external start - immediate stop been ac-
tivated? See UNISAB II drawings Digital in-
puts.
3) Do the units communicate? - check this by
means of the picture SETUP I MULTISAB
I ALL COMPRESSORS. Check communi-
cation cable.
194/222
4) Is the actual suction pressure higher than
the set point +1/2 neutral zone?
5) Are any of the limiting functions active?
6) Have AUTO START and AUTO STOP been
configured?
7) Has the COLD STORE FUNC. been config-
ured?
The plant does not run in sequence
1) Do the units communicate? In case of no
communication, each UNISAB II will run
with its own regulator. It may be useful to en-
ter the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I ALL
COMPRESSORS and go through the com-
pressor numbers (use J and K ). There will
be a question mark (?) in the lower left cor-
ner of the display if there is no communica-
tion to the UNISAB II with the selected
number.
– Check communication cable and
connection.
– Do two or more UNISAB II units have
the same compressor number (COMPR.
NO)? Check the numbers in picture
SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICA-
TIONS. They must all be unique.
2) Do all units that are supposed to run in se-
quence have identical SYSTEM NO, which
they must. Check the picture SETUP I
MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE.
3) Check whether all units in the same system
agree upon the same SYS.REGULATOR,
see picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MUL-
TISAB STATE. If this is not the case, do all
units agree on how to decide the mas-
ter/system regulator? See the PREF.MAS-
TER field in SETUP I CONFIG.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

4) If PREF. MASTER = START#, has the 5) Is START NO = 0 in one or more UNISAB II

same START NO been entered in two or
more units? See picture SETUP I MULTI-
SAB I MULTISAB STATE. They must all
be unique!
0178_439_en.fm
units? MULTISAB requires that all START
NO are higher than 0 and that not two are
identical. Note that though it is not possible
to select 0 as START NO., the START NO.
may still become 0 for several reasons.

0178-445 - ENG 195/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

196/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

15. List of Versions

This instruction manual applies to the UNISAB II version stated on page 1.
As an exception, the manual can be used for an earlier version of the UNISAB II program. In such cases
it is necessary to consult the list of versions below to identify the points where the manual cannot be relied
upon.

Version no Description
1.01 On the HPO compressor an incorrect scaling of the discharge pressure has been cor-
rected. 15 languages have been entered.
1.02 No changes in the user's operation.
1.03 The timers Start Delay and Stop Delay will be working, also when capacity is regulated
on the external 4-20 mA analog signal.
The digital output AUX = "ready" is only active when the compressor is able to start, ie
the digital input "external start permission - normal stop" must also be active.
1.04 The hour counter counts in single hours and no longer in intervals of 10 hours.
An error in press./temp. conversion for R23 refrigerant at approx -70°C has been cor-
rected.
An error in the MULTISAB system resulting in blocking of plants with three or more re-
0178_440_en.fm

ciprocating compressors in sequence has been corrected. (The compressor starting

as no 1 remained at 100% capacity at load reduction, preventing no. 2 from unloading
the last stage).
1.05 This version does not exist.
1.06 Refrigerant R508 has changed its name to R410A.
A new refrigerant, R407C, has been entered.
Two new screw compressor types have been introduced: SAB 128H Mk3 and SAB
163H Mk3.
Automatic zero position (capacity slide) setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with
automatic Vi slide as well as manual zero position setting for other screw compressor
types.
1.07 Automatic zero position setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with manual Vi slide.
The regulating speed (max speed) has been increased. The regulation is now faster
(longer pulses - particularly at low oil pressure levels) than in previous versions.
TSMC/TCMO compressors had no setpoint 2 (SP2) for discharge pipe temperature for
regulating the "intermediate press. injection". This has now been introduced.
1.08 General remarks:
During a sequence running with two or more screw compressors, it could happen that
all compressors stayed at low capacity without regulating upwards although a capacity
requirement existed. This error has been corrected in MULTISAB.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function prevents the compressor from increasing
its capacity to more than 5%, the timer "delay before stop" will not be activated as was
the case previously. The compressor will remain in operation.
The configuration point "COMMON CONDENSER" has been extended to include
"common evaporator" and is now called "COMMON EVAP/COND N/N".

0178-445 - ENG 197/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
Screw compressors:
For screw compressors two warnings have been introduced: "LIMITING SUCTION
PRESSURE"and "LIMITING DISCHARGE PRESSURE". These will occur whenever
the UNISAB II is in position "READY" but unable to start because the suction or dis-
charge pressure is within the neutral zone of the limiter in question.
For VMY compressors, the solenoid valve for "capacity down" opens whenever the
compressor is prelubricated.
A limiting function has been introduced for "high suction pressure limitation". The com-
pressor capacity is limited, during operation, to an adjustable max. value when the suc-
tion pressure is above the high warning limit for the suction pressure.
Reciprocating compressors:
A function controlling the by-pass valve ("cap.stage 1") has now been entered for the
TCMO 28 compressor.
The timers "DELAY UP" and "DELAY DOWN" that operate in connection with the load-
ing and unloading of capacity stages are now active both during capacity regulation
with external "4-20 mA input" signals or if capacity regulation takes place via data com-
munication.
1.09 General remarks:
In the TIMERS menu picture the TIMER SETUP picture has been displaced so that the
picture obtains a position on the part of the timer menu that is immediately visible when
you select the menu.
In the CALIB/AUX.OUTPUTpicture the AUX output can now be activated by: RUN-
NING and READY-EXT.
At auto alarm reset, e.g. at a low suction pressure, the alarm relay will also be auto
reset.
1.09 (cont.) Special warnings: Limiter suction pressure, Limiter discharge pressure, Limiter brine
and Limiter hot water can now be read via the Danbuss communication.
Motor currents SP1 and SP2 can now be changed right up to 2500 Amp.
Due to an error in the A/D converter software, we have received reports of a false
alarm for "Low brine temp" at "Power up" in some plants. This has now been corrected.
Via the communication it is now possible to read whether UII is in REMOTE/capacity
regulating mode. To be read as "Cap.mode".
An HP compressor started up by means of the "HP at two-stages" function + the "Ext.
start normal stop" signal, is now not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer anymore,
even though capacity is below 5%.
Screw compressors:
A Multisab error has been rectified which could occur as follows:
At suction pressure limitation, both compressors regulated down to 0% and the Lead
compressor stopped. Before the Lag compressor stopped, however, the capacity re-
quirements change. The Lag compressor then continued to run at 0% without regulat-
ing upwards, although capacity was needed. This situation coul be altered by changing
the Lead compressor from Remote to Manual after which the regulation worked cor-
rectly when switching back again to Remote.

198/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
The position regulator parameters (SP, NZ and PB) are now accessible in a new pa-
rameter picture for MOTOR/CAPACITY. It is also possible to change NZ and PB via
the communication.
Further, the neutral zone (+/-1%) at capacity regulation has been removed.
A false alarmfor "capacity error" that might occur (in some special cases), often at
100% capacity and with regulation in the neutral zone, has now been removed.
If a VMY compressor happened to fall out at "Capacity error" during operation, while
the slide was above 5%, the slide was not run down when the alarm was confirmed,
because the oil pump did not start. This has now been corrected.
The VMY compressor would stop the slide run down (the oil pump was stopped) when-
ever the capacity was below 5%. An extended hysterisis has now been introduced so
that the oil pump does not stop until 10 sec. have passed and capacity is below 4.5%.
1.09 (cont.) Reciprocating compressors:
The MULTISAB transfer- and take-over mode for linking of reciprocating and screw
compressors has now been implemented with the same functionality as that of Unis-
ab-RT.
The texts in the TIMERS, TRANSFER and TAKE-OVER pictures have been changed.
The new E-type for SMC/TSMC compressors has been introduced in CONFIG.
HPO/HPC. The setpoint for the suction pressure regulator can now be set to 25 Bar -
the discharge pressure regulator right up to 40 Bar. The warning limit for High Differ-
0178_440_en.fm

ential Pressure is 25 Bar.

1.10 Please note that this program version no. 1.10 is tied up with instruction
manual version 1.10A.
General remarks:
All SMC and TSMC compressors are going to be configured as either type S/L or E.
An HP compressor started with the "HP at two-stage" function + "Ext. start normal" sig-
nal, is not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer if the comperessor has been selected
for REMOTE/Multisab and no other compressors are operating in this system. Can
only be stopped by opening the input:"Ext. start normal".
The AUX output READY-EXT is now also applicable in AUTO
It is now possible to use a user-configurable refrigerantR000.
It is now possible to use a user-defined password.
UNISAB II can now be reconfigurered to UNISAB / Evolution.
Screw compressors:
The secondary oil pump on VMY compressors was able to make a brief start on "power
up". This has been corrected.
Prosab II and UNISAB II did not regulate correctly in LEAD-LAG.
This has been corrected.
The minimum limits for low oil pressure has been raised for Mk3 compressors.
The heating rod was not connected at compressor stop if the compressor:
1) stopped on alarm within 60 sec after start or
2) the alarm "capacity error" appeared at a stop.
This has now been rectified.
Reciprocating compressors:

0178-445 - ENG 199/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
An adjustable time delay has been built in on the oil return.
The time delay for low oil pressure is now also active during operation.
It is now possible to set up a delayed closing of the solenoid valves for oil cooling or
water cooling at compressor stop.
A limiting function has beeen introduced for high discharge temperatures.
The limiting function for "high suction pressure limitation" has now also been intro-
duced for reciprocating compressors.
The capacity of the reciprocating compressor is stored in DIAGNOSIS I OLD
ALARMS in case the alarm should fall out.
1.11 This version does not exist.
1.12 General remarks:
COP calculation and display on the UNISAB II is now possible. Select the function in
configuration. The calculated COP, the cooling output and the efficiencyare shown in
the picture COP.
The position transmitter signal for the capacity slide can be calibrated at 0 % and 100
%.
A test version containing the SAB 330 screw compressor is installed. The programme
can only be used for internal YORK test.
It is now possible to select the unit kPa in the UNISAB II.
A larger EEPROM type with a capacity of 4 kByte has been introduced. Up to now the
capacity has only been 2 kByte.
Screw compressors:
Screw compressor type SV 80 is now supported.
The UNISAB Evolution II data are now automatically updated in the Evolution menu
structure.
An error whereby the heating element was not activated after switching the power
on/off has been rectified.
Aconversion error in the display of oil filter difference pressure has now been rectified.
The error only occured during PSI conversion.
Reciprocating compressors:
It is now possible to disconnect the MULTISAB "transfer/take-over" function.
A MULTISAB error which occurred in a certain combination of plants with both screw
compressors and reciprocating compressors has now been rectified.
1.13 General remarks:
EEPROM, calibration settings and hour counter are saved.
Screw compressors
In version 1.12 the VMY compressors started the prelubrication pumps shortly after
power up. This has now been rectified.
Reciprocating compressors:
When the UNISAB II has been configured so that it is regulated using the brine tem-
perature, and this is in the lower P-Band, and a limiting function at the same time is
active, the UNISAB II will - when the lowest step has been reached - count down in
"delay down" instead of "stop timer". This has now been rectified.

200/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
1.13 Version 1.13 - which is marked with the date 990831 - differs from the original 1.13
(990831) mainly on the following points:
It is found in three varieties: 1.13-A, 1.13-B and 1.13-C. The three varieties contain the
same program but in three different sets of languages:
-1.13-A: English, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Norwegian and Swedish.
-1.13-B: English, German, French, Hungarian, Dutch and Russian.
-1.13-C: English, Czech, Spanish, Greek, Portuguese and Polish.
When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or when a program
RESET is performed, the set language is English.
Low oil pressure alarm is delayed extra 10 seconds at compressor start to avoid unin-
tended alarm.
A number of alarms and warnings has been added.
The alarm #83 "Vi position" appears if the shown capacity is 100% while the measured
capacity position is < 20%.
1.13 A number of errors have been corrected compared to earlier versions.
(000224) Additionally,
it is now possible in the MULTISAB→ PARALLEL CONTR picture to type in an OFF-
SET to the parallel capacity;
changes regarding "Evolution" have been carried out.
0178_440_en.fm

2.00 General remarks:

The following compressor types have been added:
-SAB 128 HR
-SAB 163 HR
-SAB 250 S/L/E
-SAB 330 S/L/E
The following refrigerant type has been added: R744 (CO2).
Communication with Quantum compressor controller now possible.
The AUX OUTPUT can now additionally be configured to "READY AND ME ONLY"
which can be used to ensure water circulation at the PT100 sensor even if no com-
pressor is running.
The manual has been thoroughly updated.

0178-445 - ENG 201/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
Screw compressors:
The capacity control is now being carried out by standard PID controllers.
Minimum capacity increase/decreace pulse 0.3 sec.
At compressor stop, capacity down signal until capacity < 5%.
Reciprocating compressors:
A low pass filter has been attached to the suction superheat to avoid low superheat
alarm when unloading stages. The timer "Low superheat" is now adjustable 15 - 600
sec.
2.01 Further remarks:
Compressor types SAB 283 L/E, SAB 355 L as well as the GSV/RWF series (see con-
figuration).
Two new refrigerants: R1270 (Propylene), R 290 (Propane).
One new timer has been introduced for screw compressors:
Timer 33 Lubricating pressure.
One new timer for reciprocating and screw compressors have been introduced:
Timer 32 Low suction pressure.
Turkish has been added.
Timer for oil filter differential pressure has been raised to 300 seconds.
Screw compressor, type SAB 80. Max values for oil filter differential pressure have
been changed to: Alarm = 2.5 bar and warning = 2.2 bar.
Contrast can now be adjusted from any menu picture by means of the RESET button
and the arrow up/down keys.
Low alarm and low warning for brine temperature have been changed from -60°C to
100°C.
Screw compressor: Start delay and stop delay factors affecting the countdown of the
timer have been changed to start and stop delay “zones” in [%] of the P-band. When
regulated value is outside a “zone”, the timer will start. Set value 0-100 [%]. Setting of
0 [%] results in the “zone” passing over to the other side of Nz, ie. a stop delay zone =
0 % means that the stop delay timer will start when regulated value is inside or below
Nz.

2.01 (020221) EEPROM. When switching to the use of two EPROMS at the same time (from version
2.0x) a timing problem occurred which had the effect that writing to and reading from
the EEPROM was not always carried out correctly. This has now been rectified.

202/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
2.01 ROTA This version has never been officially released but has primarily been used for rotatune
units and as spare part for correction of errors.
General remarks
If the compressor capacity was controlled by a 4-20 mA signal, the compressor would
not start even though the signal exceeded 4.8 mA (5% capacity). This has now been
rectified.
At the initial start-up of UNISAB II, the start number and system number were set at a
fixed value of “0”. This had the effect that the compressor could not start and operate
in auto and remote control. This has now been rectified.
Multisab sequence was not optimized to support correct operation between frequency
controlled and conventional compressors. This has now been rectified.
The menu lines CAPACITY and VOLUME have been moved from the MOTOR picture
in the main menu to a new picture called CAPACITY. This picture is found below the
SET UP menu. See menu tree in the beginning of your manual.
There is a new menu line below the MOTOR picture which is called MOTOR FRE-
QUENCY. It indicates motor revolutions per minute when the compressor capacity is
regulated by a frequency converter.
The COP picture has been moved from the CALIBRATION menu to the CONFIGURA-
TION menu.
0178_440_en.fm

Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, MOTOR INPUT.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
Screw compressors
When operating in 100% capacity for a longer period of time, sometimes the compres-
sor would simply stop for no reason with the alarm for capacity error on. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: Gram GST screw compressor with
stepless capacity slide control and control of the volume slide in three steps by means
of two solenoid valves. Volume ratios: 2.2-3.5-5.
The volume transmitter can now be calibrated by means of software calibration. See
the calibration section in your manual.
The “feedback” signal from a frequency converter can now be calibrated by means of
software calibration. See the calibration section in your manual.
Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, CAP/FREQ.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
A new timer has been introduced in connection with GST compressors: Timer 34 Vi-
pause.
Reciprocating compressors
HPO/HPC. High warning is increased from 25.0 bar to 25.2 bar. Thus, the limiter zone
is now 25.0-25.2 bar.

0178-445 - ENG 203/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version no Description
2.02.1 This version replaces all prior versions.
General remarks
4-20 mA initialization error during UNISAB II restart. The display was flashing during
reconnection of power supply to UNISAB II. The error first occurred in version 2.01. It
has now been rectified.
The ROTA concept has now been extended to include reciprocating compressors with
frequency converters and screw compressors controlled by a combination of frequen-
cy, capacity slide and volume slide.
The multisab system now handles both frequency controlled screw and reciprocating
compressors which operate in sequence with either reciprocating and/or screw com-
pressors.
The “copy EEPROM” function, when changing parts in UNISAB II or at low battery volt-
age and a simultaneous reconnection of power supply, has now been changed. Thus
it is no longer necessary to enter password to reply YES, simply press “arrow left” to
restart. See service section in the manual for further details.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simultaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: During operation,
the green diode on the front cover would start to flash for about one minute and then,
for no apparent reason, the compressor would stop. This has now been rectified.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simoltaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: In case of a
pause before compressor start-up, the compressor would not start. The start delay tim-
er kept counting in negative seconds instead of stopping at 0 and starting the compres-
sor. This has now been rectified.
Configuration. There are two new menu lines in the picture MOTOR below the CON-
FIG menu, namely, MINIMUM frequency and MAXIMUM frequency. See the configu-
ration section.
Multisab error in connection with direct capacity control: When disrupting the 4-20 mA
remote control signal for several UNISAB II compressors at the same time, not all of
the compressors will start when the signal returns. This has now been rectified. The
error might also occur in EPROM version 1.13 and earlier.
In the Instruction Manual of version 2.02 and in later manuals, there are charts of “UN-
ISAB II Settings” and “UNISAB II diagnosis” in the back of this book. These used to be
in the Starting-up Manual.
All new menus and parameters of this version are primarily shown in English only,
even if a language other than English has been chosen. However, the following five
languages are fully translated: Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French and Italian. The re-
maining languages will be updated in later versions as they are being translated.
Screw compressors
When regulating the discharge pressure, the regulator would be out of order and thus
capacity could either be 0% or 100% but could not settle at medium capacity. This has
now been rectified.
Timer values concerning the prelubrication function for screw compressors was not in-
itialized correctly after factory reset - only if followed by a power reset. This has now
been rectified.

204/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version Description

There was an error in the regulator, which would only occur when a limiter was in passive
mode and when, at the same time, more capacity was required. This error caused the ca-
pacity to decrease very slowly as long as the limiter was in passive mode. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: SAB110SR/LR.
The PID-regulator function has been thoroughly explained in this version of the manual and
it contains practical examples of general usage of this function.
Known errors of this version:
General remarks
Multisab. Sequential control of several rotatune compressors in the same system as con-
ventional compressors (rotatune master/slave operation) has not yet been implemented. It
is expected to be implemented in version 2.02.2.
The following concerns compressors which control frequency on the frequency converter
by means of a 4-20 mA output signal from the UNISAB II and only in MANUAL OPERA-
TION MODE:
In MANUAL MODE, the compressor capacity will be regulated back to the capacity it had
before the limiter went into active MODE, as soon as the limiter is no longer in function.
Therefore, if capacity is manually regulated up to e.g. 80% and the limiter is activated and
0178_440_en.fm

forces capacity down to e.g. 30%, capacity will then automatically be regulated back to 80%
as soon as the limiter is no longer in function. This regulation takes place without activating
the capacity keys.
UNISAB II Evolution: When changing baudrate for port 1 (when using Evolution PLC), a
factory reset must be carried out or UNISAB II must be turned off and on. If this is not car-
ried out, the new communication speed will not be initialized and communication to the PLC
cannot be effected.
Screw compressors
SAB110SR/LR. During operation for a long period of time in remote or auto control, it might
be quite some time before capacity is decreased even though the regulator requires less
capacity.
Reciprocating compressors
Motor frequency control in connection with two-stage reciprocating compressors has not
yet been fully implemented.

0178-445 - ENG 205/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version Description

2.02.2 General remarks

Multisab sequence with several rotatune compressors running in the same system is now
implemented but has not yet been tested. It is expected to be released in the next version.
UNISAB II evolution; when changing communication speed on port 1 for use with Evolution
PLC, the new speed is now initialised automatically.
Superuser password has been changed.
Textual errors have been corrected in the Swedish instruction manual.
When installing eprom version 2.02.2 instead of an earlier version and at the same time
maintaining battery voltage on UNISAB II, the contrast now initialises at a value between
20 and 80 when pressing the “R” key. Afterwards, the contrast can be adjusted by simulta-
neously activating the “Reset” key and the “arrow up” or “arrow down” key.
Screw compressors
Screw compressor SAB110SR/LR. When operating at 100% capacity for a long period of
time in either remote or auto control, the length of period until capacity was reduced was
disproportionately long even though the regulator had required less capacity. This has now
been rectified.
Due to an error in the outer PID-regulator, a screw compressor about to stop would keep
running at minimum capacity because the “delay before stop” timer was reset and started
recounting before the compressor stopped. The problem only appeared when e.g. the suc-
tion pressure value passed the limit between NZ and the lower P-band. This problem ap-
plies to all regulating modes. Furthermore, the compressor would run up capacity a little
every time this limit was passed. This has now been rectified.
Known errors
When using the “copy eeprom” function, all timer values are reset at default values.

206/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version Description

2.03.1 General remarks

Mode of operation has been changed for timer no. 32 "Low suction pressure". Now the
alarm for low suction pressure can be suppressed for up to 60 seconds during both start-
up and operation.
Rotatune multisab function; the taking over function has been corrected. Now a master
compressor includes subsequent stopped rotatune compressors (slaves) in the taking over
calculation when attempting to take over a subsequent screw compressor. Earlier, it only
included its own 60% free capacity in the taking over calculation. See Rota appendix.
A false warning for low suction pressure when the compressor is in stopped control mode
has been corrected. Before, the warning disappeared when control mode was changed
from stopped but it generated false warnings which communicated with the UNISAB net-
work either via the Sabcom II driver or the Comsab II module. The warning typically ap-
peared when the suction pressure lay between the low alarm default value and the low
warning default value.
Rotatune multisab. An error regarding several systems in the same network has been cor-
rected. When a rotatune compressor was operating with several systems in the network
(e.g. low and high pressure systems) the multisab system would fail. A slave which was
starting up would immediately stop after only a few seconds.
Rotatune multisab. When a master compressor was stopped due to an alarm, the slave did
not automatically adopt the role of master regulator. This has now been rectified.
0178_440_en.fm

Screw compressors
Timer no. 7 "Prelubrication" has been changed for screw compressors of the SABxxxHR
type. Prelubrication has been changed from a default value of 10 seconds to 0 seconds.
The compressor will still be prelubricated but the compressor motor must start up immedi-
ately when the signal of the oil flow switch is present.
An error has been corrected in rotatune multisab between two rota screw compressors.
When two rotatune compressors were running in parallel, the master ran with a fixed ca-
pacity of e.g. 60% and the slave hunted up and down with a variation of 5-10% around the
the master’s 60%=50-70% when it should be running with the same capacity as the master.
To compensate for this, the default values for the internal regulator on the UNISAB II on the
slave compressor must be changed. P-band should be changed from 200 to 400%, T.int.
from 30 to 90 seconds and minimum pulse should be changed to 0.3 seconds.
Reciprocating compressors
Reciprocating compressor Mk4. A new timer no. 11 is introduced, "Filter diff. High". On Mk4
reciprocating compressors, the oil filter differential pressure is monitored by an electrical
switch. Digital input 9 is usually open. If the differential pressure exceeds the set value, the
switch gives an input signal. If this signal is active for more than 300 seconds, the warning
"high oil differential pressure" is given. There is no operating limiting function in this warn-
ing. See wiring diagrams for installation of this switch.
The auxiliary output function has been corrected. When using the auxiliary output function
for maximum and minimum capacity respectively, this did not function correctly for rotatune
machines in earlier eprom versions.
Rotatune reciprocating compressors. An error has been corrected in the outer regulator.
The neutral zone value was doubled so that it applied both above and below the set point.
Now, the neutral zone is divided in equal parts above and below the set point. See also the
section about regulation in this manual.

0178-445 - ENG 207/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

Version Description

Known errors
When using the "copy eeprom" function, all timer values are reset at default values.
When using the 4-20 mA analog output function from UNISAB II to a frequency
converter to control the speed of the compressor motor the following problem is
found:
When running in auto or remote control mode, it is still possible to change the
speed of the compressor motor with the operating keys capacity up or capacity
down. This should only be possible in manual control mode.

208/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
16. Spare parts for UNISAB II

16. Spare parts for UNISAB II

Item Part number

Normal spare parts set 3084-394

Set of accessories - UNISAB II 1572-018

EPROM tongs 1613-002

EEPROM tongs 1613-003

EEPROM (2kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.10 and earlier versions. 1571-015

EEPROM (4kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.12 and later versions. 1571-018

Certificate set 3084-383

Normal spare parts set 3084-394

Front cover with sheet and display, YORK Refrigeration logo 1573-008

Front cover with sheet and display, Sabroe logo 1573-007

CPU print (rev. C) 1572-026

Relay print (rev. G) 1574-016

0178_441_en.fm

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-9 bar 1) 1373-249

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS2050-1-25 bar 1373-271

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-59 bar 2) 1373-251

Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/2" thread) 3) 1373-245

Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/4" thread) 4) 1373-252

Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/4" thread) 5) 1373-264

Position transmitter 6) 3448-004

Position transmitter 7) 3448-___

Position transmitter 8) 3448-___

Position transmitter 9) 3448-___

Notes: SAB 163B, SAB 163H (not HR) and SAB

1) Not used for HPO/HPC compressors 202 compressors.
2) Only used forHPO/HPC compressors 7) Only for SAB 250 and SAB 330 compres-
3) Units supplied before November 1995 sors.
4) Units supplied after 1 November 1995 8) Only for SAB 80 compressors.
5) Units supplied after 1 January 1997 9) Only for SV 10/20 compressors (not Ro-
6) Only for SAB 110, SAB 128H (not HR), tatune)

0178-445 - ENG 209/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
16. Spare parts for UNISAB II

210/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03
17. Supplementary Material

17. Supplementary Material

"Quick Reference"Leaflet
Installing a data communications cable0171-745
Data sheet for AKS 32R -(-1/+9 bar)0178-410
Data sheet for AKS 2050 - (-1/+25 bar)0178-414
Electrical Wiring Diagrams for:
• Mounting of ground log and emergency stop
(page AC038_13)
2347-002
• Voltage equalization (page AC040_10)
2347-002
0178_442_en.fm
Data sheet for Pt100 sensor - Temp./resistance
table0178-411
Capacity and Vi pos. transmitters0178-412
• Screw compressors(page 1-4, 10-14,
16-22, 25-32, 35-36, 39-40)
3448-235
• Reciprocating compressors (page 1-40)
3448-236

0178-445 - ENG 211/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
17. Supplementary Material

212/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

Index

A Additional unload
reciprocating compr. ........................................................................................ 39
Adjusting slide velocity .......................................................................................... 97
Alarm
alarm from Chiller ............................................................................................. 57
auxiliary input signal ......................................................................................... 55
capacity .......................................................................................................... 103
capacity error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
Cooling fan error .............................................................................................. 56
Error in diagnosis- EEPROM ........................................................................... 57
Evolution
no communication to PLC .......................................................................... 58
full flow pump error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56
high motor temperature .................................................................................... 56
identification numbers Alarms-warnings .......................................................... 59
Limiting brine temperature ............................................................................... 57
Limiting discharge pressure ............................................................................. 57
0178-445IX.fm

Limiting discharge temperature ........................................................................ 57

Limiting hot water ............................................................................................. 57
Limiting suction pressure ................................................................................. 57
low lubricating pressure monitoring ................................................................. 58
motor error ....................................................................................................... 55
motor overload ...........................................................................................55, 56
no communication to Chiller ............................................................................. 57
no starting permission ...................................................................................... 55
oil pump error
SAB 80 ....................................................................................................... 56
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56
oil rectifier error ................................................................................................ 57
oil system error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
overload discharge pressure ............................................................................ 56
suction gas superheat ...................................................................................... 54
Vi-position error ................................................................................................ 57
Wrong starting number in sequence ................................................................ 57
Analog inputs
numbering ...................................................................................................... 145
Auto
Start ................................................................................................................. 34
stop .................................................................................................................. 34

0178-445 - ENG 213/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Automatic setting of a new zero point

(SAB 202) ........................................................................................................99
Aux.
output .............................................................................................................119

B Baud rate
port 1 ................................................................................................................41
port 2 ................................................................................................................42
selecting ...........................................................................................................39
Booster
menu description ..............................................................................................35
Brine
temperature ......................................................................................................33
Brine temperature
Calibration ......................................................................................................126

C Cabinet
open the cabinet ..............................................................................................13
Calculated Vi position ..........................................................................................102
Calibration ...........................................................................................................125
Capacity
corrected capacity ............................................................................................98
Capacity measuring system
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Calibration ................................................................................................130
Turning Transmitter
Calibration ................................................................................................128
Change to full load ...............................................................................................102
Change to part load .............................................................................................102
Checklist ..............................................................................................................173
Chiller
menu description ..............................................................................................41
Circuit board with light diodes ..............................................................................147
Clima control
menu description ..............................................................................................39
Climate control
description ........................................................................................................95
code plug ...............................................................................................................12
Cold store
funktion ..........................................................................................................120
menu description ..............................................................................................39
Compressor
adjusting slide velocity .....................................................................................97
slide data ............................................................................................. 42, 43, 44
Configuration
menus ..............................................................................................................27
Control and surveillance ......................................................................................111

214/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

Aux. output ..................................................................................................... 119

Capacity down blocked .................................................................................. 120
Cold store function ......................................................................................... 120
COP setting .................................................................................................... 119
External start permission- immediate stop ..................................................... 117
External start permission- normal stop .......................................................... 118
FV 19 with oil pump ....................................................................................... 115
FV 24/26 with oil pump .................................................................................. 114
GSV/RWF with oil pump ................................................................................ 113
Motor current measuring ................................................................................ 118
motor power measuring ................................................................................. 119
Power management system .......................................................................... 120
Reciprocating compressors ........................................................................... 117
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2 without oil pump ....................................................... 116
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump ...................................................... 116
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump .......................................................................... 117
SAB 202/ 163 & 128H MK3 with oil pump ..................................................... 111
SAB 283/ 330 and 355 with oil pump ............................................................. 112
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump ...................................................... 113
SAB128/163 HR with oil pump ....................................................................... 111
Thermistor connection ................................................................................... 119
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump ........................................................ 116
0178-445IX.fm

VMY Mk 3 without full flow pump ................................................................... 116

VMY Mk3 with full flow pump ......................................................................... 111
Control mode ......................................................................................................... 79
COP
active ................................................................................................................ 40
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142
setting ............................................................................................................ 119

D Danbuss
menu description .............................................................................................. 41
Data communication cable
installing the data communication cable ........................................................ 164
Define refrigerant R000 ....................................................................................... 122
Diagnosis
Analog inputs ................................................................................................. 140
COP ............................................................................................................... 142
Digital inputs .................................................................................................. 140
Digital outputs ................................................................................................ 140
Examine memory ........................................................................................... 141
Insp. old alarms .............................................................................................. 137
Misc. functions ............................................................................................... 139
New password ............................................................................................... 141
No. of alarms .................................................................................................. 141
pictures .......................................................................................................... 137
serial number ................................................................................................. 141
Software version ............................................................................................ 139

0178-445 - ENG 215/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Zero capacity pos. ..........................................................................................142

Digital inputs
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140
Digital inputs and outputs
Numbering .....................................................................................................143
Digital outputs
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140
Discharge pressure
menu description ..............................................................................................33
overload ...........................................................................................................56
Display
contrast ............................................................................................................25
description ........................................................................................................13
in Bar or °C/R ...................................................................................................20
Display indications
various limiters ...............................................................................................109

E Economizer
high suction pressure .......................................................................................35
low capacity .....................................................................................................35
menu description ..............................................................................................35
Electrical slide control
SAB 250 and SAB 330 ...................................................................................101
Evolution
no communication to PLC ................................................................................58
warning from PLC ............................................................................................58
Examine memory
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
EXT.COOL
menu description ..............................................................................................34
EXT.HEAT
menu description ..............................................................................................34
External input
universal regulators ..........................................................................................91

F Factory setting
restore setting ..................................................................................................41
Factory settings
return to ... ........................................................................................................25
Flow factor
menu description ..............................................................................................41
Front panel
control/recording section ..................................................................................14
green lamp .......................................................................................................14
Red lamp ..........................................................................................................14
Yellow lamp ......................................................................................................14

216/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

Function
changing a function .......................................................................................... 24

G Green ..................................................................................................................... 14
Grounding ............................................................................................................ 166

H High difference pressure Limiter .......................................................................... 107

HP
on two stage ..................................................................................................... 36
HP on TWO-STAGE ............................................................................................ 121
Hydraulic slide systems
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 127

I Input signal
Auxiliary input signal
screw compressors .................................................................................... 49
auxiliary input signal
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 52
recip.compr. ................................................................................................ 51
0178-445IX.fm

L Languages
list of languages ............................................................................................... 26
Limiting functions
Standard limiters ............................................................................................ 105
Liquid subcool
menu description .............................................................................................. 41
List of Versions .................................................................................................... 197
Loading sequence ............................................................................................... 180
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................ 131

M Manual setting of a new zero point ........................................................................ 99

Manual zero ........................................................................................................... 40
Mecanical zero ...................................................................................................... 40
Menu Tree
One-stage Reciprocating Compressor ............................................................. 17
Screw Compressor .......................................................................................... 16
Two-stage reciprocating compressor ............................................................... 18
Motor
alarm for cooling fan error ................................................................................ 56
alarm for high motor temperature .................................................................... 56
alarm motor overload ....................................................................................... 55
current
calibration ................................................................................................. 127

0178-445 - ENG 217/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

limiter ........................................................................................................106
measuring .................................................................................................118
range ..........................................................................................................38
motor error alarm .............................................................................................55
motor overload alarm .......................................................................................56
power measuring ...........................................................................................119
signal ................................................................................................................42
size ...................................................................................................................41
Multisab
compressor. no. 1 to 14 ...................................................................................35
description ........................................................................................................74
parallel control ..................................................................................................77
preferred master ..............................................................................................35
regulating Setup .............................................................................................169
regulation .......................................................................................................167
special timers
recip.compr. ................................................................................................73
state .................................................................................................................75
system setup ..................................................................................................168
take over ..........................................................................................................41

N New password
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
No. of alarms
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
Node no
port 1 ................................................................................................................41
port 2 ................................................................................................................42

O Oil cooling
selecting ...........................................................................................................38
setting ..............................................................................................................37
Oil heating ...........................................................................................................122
Oil pump
full flow
screw compr. ..............................................................................................34
Oil rectifier
selecting ...........................................................................................................40
Oil return
reciprocating compressors .............................................................................121
Operating sequence ............................................................................................183

P Part load and Full load .........................................................................................101

Password
Applying the password .....................................................................................22
Changing the password ...................................................................................22

218/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

description ........................................................................................................ 22
Resetting the password ................................................................................... 23
P-band
factor ................................................................................................................ 71
start delay ........................................................................................................ 71
stop delay ......................................................................................................... 71
PBF ........................................................................................................................ 72
PID
controller .......................................................................................................... 81
Port 1
menu description .............................................................................................. 40
Port 2
menu description .............................................................................................. 41
Position indications .............................................................................................. 102
Pref. master = START
Starting- and system numbers ....................................................................... 178
Prelubrication
menu description .............................................................................................. 34
Press
menu description .............................................................................................. 42
Pressure
measured/calculated pressure levels
0178-445IX.fm

recip.compressors ...................................................................................... 50
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 48
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 51
Pressure transducers
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 125
Printed circuit board, light diodes ........................................................................ 146

R Regulators ............................................................................................................. 79
Replacing
CPU print and EEPROM ................................................................................ 160
the battery ...................................................................................................... 163
the CPU print ................................................................................................. 159
the door .......................................................................................................... 159
the EPROM (program) UNISAB II .................................................................. 161
the relay print ................................................................................................. 160
the serial EEPROM (diagnosis) ..................................................................... 162
Rotatune
menu description ........................................................................................42, 43

S Sequence
The plant does not run in sequence ............................................................... 194
Serial number
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 141
Service ................................................................................................................. 159

0178-445 - ENG 219/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Set points
control with current input ..................................................................................91
on regulators ....................................................................................................90
Settings
regulating parameters
reciprocating compressors .........................................................................86
SAB 330 .....................................................................................................90
screw compressors .....................................................................................88
Short-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................132
Slide brake control ...............................................................................................102
Spacer block
built-in space block ........................................................................................100
Spare parts for UNISAB II ...................................................................................209
Special Limiters ...................................................................................................107
State of take-over ................................................................................................189
State of transfer ...................................................................................................188
Suction Pressure
menu description ..............................................................................................33
Superuser keyword
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
Swept volumen
menu description ..............................................................................................39
System numbers ..................................................................................................177

T Temperature
Measured and calculated temperatures
screw compressors .....................................................................................50
measured and calculated temperatures
screw compressors .....................................................................................49
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ...................................................................................................51
Timer description
reciprocating compressors ...............................................................................69
screw compressors ..........................................................................................66
Timers
menu ................................................................................................................61
reciprocating compressor values .....................................................................65
screw compressor values ................................................................................63
Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................137
Trouble-shooting
The plant cannot start ....................................................................................194
Trouble-shooting diagrams
General trouble-shooting, UNISAB II .............................................................156
Start compressor
in AUTO, continued ..........................................................................153, 154
in MANUAL, continued .............................................................................150
Start of compressor

220/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 UNISAB II 2.03

in AUTO mode .......................................................................................... 152

in MANUAL mode ..................................................................................... 149
Start Screw comp,
Prelub. in MANUAL, continued ................................................................. 151
Start Screw comp.
Prelub. in AUTO mode, continued ............................................................ 155

U Universal regulator
ext.input ........................................................................................................... 91
Unloading sequence ....................................................................................182, 185

V Value
changing a value .............................................................................................. 23
Variable Zero position ............................................................................................ 98
Vi
mode ................................................................................................................ 41
Volume ratio
auto .................................................................................................................. 34
Volume ratio slide .................................................................................................. 97
0178-445IX.fm

W Warning
Evolution
warning from PLC ....................................................................................... 58
identification numbers alarms / warnings ......................................................... 59
watch the oil pressure ...................................................................................... 57
Water
cooling
recip. compr. ............................................................................................... 36
menu description .............................................................................................. 33

Y Yellow .................................................................................................................... 14

Z Zero capacity pos.

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142
Zero point
automatic setting .............................................................................................. 99
configuration .................................................................................................. 100
manual setting of a new zero point .................................................................. 99
Zero pos.
menu .............................................................................................................. 101

0178-445 - ENG 221/222

Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

222/222 0178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09
 2.02-020911 IVH
Date: ____________ Init: ______

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Customer: ROC No.:

Enduser: Order No.:

Plant Type:

Compressor Shop No.: Compressor Type:

Local Compr. No. : Software version/date

0179-005-EN 1
 2.02-020911 IVH

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Setup>Configuration
>Control >Economizer >COP >Measuring unit
No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting
01 Control On 01 Eco Low Cap. 01 COP Active 01 Press./Temp.
02 Auto Start 02 Eco High Suction 02 Flow Factor 02 Press
03 Auto Stop 03 Liq. Sub-cooling 03 Motor Signal
04 Cold Store >Motor 04 Motor Input
05 Climate Control No Function Setting >Communication 05 Cap/Freq
01 Range Motor Current No Function Setting >Unit Plant
>Compressor 02 Range Motor Power 01 Danbuss No Function Setting
No Function Setting 03 Motor size kW 02 Compressor No. 01 Refrigerant
01 Compressor Type 04 Rotatune 03 Baud Rate 02 Chiller
02 Swept Volume 05 min freq 04 Port 1 >Factory reset
03 Booster 06 max freq 05 Node No 01 Factory Reset
04 Volume Ratio >Multisab 06 Baud Rate
05 Economizer No Function Setting 07 Port 2
06 Mech. Zero 01 Pref. Master 08 Node No
07 Manual Zero 02 Common Evap/Cond 09 Baud Rate
08 Vi Mode % 03 HP on Two Stage 10 Profibus
09 Add. Unload 04 Take Over 11 Node No
>Oil system 12 Baud Rate
No Function Setting
01 Pre-lubrication
02 Full Flow Pump
03 Oil Cooling
04 Water Cooled
05 Oil Rectifier

0179-005-EN 2
 2.02-020911 IVH

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Alarm-/Warning Limits & Regulator High High Low Low Set pt. Set pt. NZ PB T. T. MIN RUN
Settings (1) Alarm Warning Warning Alarm No. 1 No. 2 INTE DIFF PULS TIME

Suction>Suction pressure [ºC/R]

Suction>Suction superheat

Discharge>Disch. superheat
Oil>Oil pressure
Oil>Diff. pressure (*S)

Oil>Oil temperature
Motor>Motor current
Motor>Motor Power
Setup>Capacity>Capacity (*S)

Setup>Capacity>Vi Position (*S)

Intermediate>Interm. temperature (*R)

All the empty/not used squares must always be filled out. ///////////

The availability of the areas framed is dependent upon the configuration of the UNISAB II.

Setup>Control (1+2) Setup>Multisab>Multisab state (2) Setup>Diagnose> Setup>Language (2) >Setup>Diagnose

Compressor Control Start No. System No. Sys. Controller Software version / date Contrast Language >Misc. functions
Brake Delay

0179-005-EN 3
 2.02-020911 IVH

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate>
Press Transducer Brine Temp. (2) Cap. Pos Motor Freq
Suction Adjust Brine Adjust Cap. Pos Motor Freq
Discharge Adjust Cap. Zero Ad Frq. Zero Adj
Oil Adjust Cap. 100 Adj Freq. 100 Adj
Diff. Adjust
Imed. Adjust

Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate> Setup>Calibrate>

Vi position 4-20mA Input Aux. Output Cap. Limits (1)

Vi Position 4mA Activate When Signal Low

Vi. Zero Adj 20mA Signal High
Vi. 100 Adj Used at Limit High

Setup>Timers>Timers Setup (1)

No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting

Prelubrication (*S)
01 Start-Start Delay 07 25 Oil Rect. Start
Delay Down (*R)
02 Stop-Start Delay 08 Transfer max 26 Oil Rect. Delay
03 Start Delay 09-20 NOT ADJUSTABLE 27 Oil Rect. Disable
04 Stop Delay 21 Motor Start 28 Start HP
05 Suction Ramp 22 PMS Feedback 29 NOT ADJUSTABLE
Slide Max (*S) F.F. Pump Start (*S) 30 Cap. Negative (*S)
06 23
Delay Up (*R) Oil Cool On (*R) 31 Start Unload (*S)
Oil Pump Start (*S) 32 Low suct. press
24
Oil Return (*R) 33 NOT ADJUSTABLE

0179-005-EN 4
 2.02-020911 IVH

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Setup>Timers> Setup>Timers> Setup>Timers> Setup>Timers>

Service (2) P Band Factor (1) Transfer (1) Take Over (1)

On Time Delay Up (*R) Factor Down (*R) Factor Up (*R)

(Service Hours) Delay Down (*R) Zone (*R) Factor Start (*R)

Start Delay Zone (*R)

Stop Delay

Notes:

*(S) = Screw, *(R) = Reciprocating

(1) The value(s) will be changed to factory settings by a “Factor Reset”.
(2) The value(s) are not stored in the EEPROM and will therefore be changed to ‘initial settings’ after a “Copy EEPROM” messages on the display.
The hour counter “Setup>Timers>Service>On Time” will be reset to zero.

0179-005-EN 5
 Date: Init.:

96.09

Diagnosis for UNISAB II

Customer: Ordre no.:

Compressor shop no.: Compr. type:

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms

Alarm text (type of alarm)
Date and time of alarm

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms > Ctrl state Current operating conditions Unit
Compressor Control Text
Compressor State Text
Start no 0-14
System no 1-14
Multisab state Text
On time Hour
Since start Sec/Hour
Rev. 0

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms > Current Unit Diagnosis > Inspect old Diagnosis>
Measure values operating alarms >
1661-215-EN

conditions
No Input Output Digital Digital
Input Output
Suction temp. °C 1
Suction press. °C/R 2
Suction superheat °C 3
Disch. temp °C 4
Disch. press. °C/R 5
Disch. superheat °C 6
Brine temp. °C 7
Oil temp. °C 8
Oil press. BAR 9
Diff. press. (S) BAR 10
Intermediate press. (R) °C/R 11
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Intermediate temp. (R) °C 12
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Vi position (S) % 13
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Capacity position % 14
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Ext. input 15
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Motor current Amp 16
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
17
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
Notes:
18
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
* (S) = Screw, (R) = Reciprocating

1661-215-EN Rev. 0 1